Loughborough University
Leicestershire, UK
LE11 3TU
+44 (0)1509 222222
Loughborough University

Programme Specifications

Programme Specification

MM BEng (Hons) Manufacturing Engineering (2018 and 2019 Entry)

Academic Year: 2019/20

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)
Institution of Mechanical Engineers (IMechE)

Final award BEng/ BEng +DIS /BEng + DIntS/ BEng + DPS
Programme title Manufacturing Engineering
Programme code WSUB01
Length of programme The duration of the programme is 6 semesters, or 8 semesters if students undertake the additional period of study, normally between Parts B and C, leading to the award of the Diploma in Industrial Studies, the Diploma of International Studies or the Diploma of Professional Studies.
UCAS code H710, HH1T
Admissions criteria

BEng - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/h710

 

BEng + DIntS/DPS - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/hh1t

 

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The overall aim of this programme is to develop students with core knowledge, skills and attributes able to work effectively and progress rapidly in manufacturing industries. This is undertaken through taught courses that cover the essential engineering and management disciplines supported by practical and transferable skills development.

Specific aims are:    

•      A1.   To produce engineering graduates ready to play a substantial role in manufacturing companies through a combination of technical, commercial and social awareness.

•      A2.   To provide a foundation for graduates wishing to progress to professional engineering status.

•      A3.   To deliver core subjects in engineering science, mathematics, manufacturing processes and technologies that underpin a career in manufacturing engineering.

•      A4.   To provide a high quality educational experience for students in a programme of study which combines wide ranging aspects of manufacturing technologies, manufacturing management, design for manufacture and engineering design

•      A5.   To develop analytical and transferable skills that will enable graduates to solve problems individually and in teams, and gain employment in a wide variety of professions, and thereby make a valuable contribution to society and wealth creation.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015). 

  • Engineering Council (UK). ‘UK-SPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan.2014. 

  • Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014. 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:

  • K1.   The underpinning science, mathematics and other disciplines associated with a career in manufacturing engineering;
  • K2.   Engineering principles, quantitative methods, mathematical and computer models;
  • K3.   Codes of practice, industry standards and quality issues applicable to a career in manufacturing engineering;
  • K4.   Management techniques to organise manufacturing engineering activities and an understanding of the commercial and economic context of an engineering business;
  • K5.   The importance of sustainable development, legal, ethical and intellectual property issues within the modern industrial world;
  • K6.   The characteristics of engineering materials, manufacturing processes and technologies.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • C1.   Identify a manufacturing related problem, evaluate its requirements and generate innovative solutions that consider a range of constraints including production capabilities, sustainability and economics;
  • C2.   Apply appropriate methods (including analytical and computational methods) to model and assess such solutions;
  • C3.   Apply mathematical and scientific methods to the analysis of manufacturing related problems making appropriate allowance for uncertainty in the available data;
  • C4.   Appreciate the role and constraints of engineers in other disciplines.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • P1.   Use appropriate computer software and computational techniques;
  • P2.   Use appropriate laboratory and mechanical workshop equipment competently and safely;
  • P3.   Research information relating to manufacturing technologies and their management;
  • P4.   Prepare engineering drawings and technical reports and give technical presentations;
  • P5.   Demonstrate organisational and management skills.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • T1.   Apply creative and structured approaches to problem solving;
  • T2.   Gather and collate key technical information from a range of sources;
  • T3.   Communicate effectively through written, graphical, interpersonal and presentation skills;
  • T4.   Operate and apply a range of computer based information systems;
  • T5.   Monitor and adjust a personal programme of work on an on-going basis and learn independently;
  • T6.   Work in a team and understand the different roles;
  • T7.   Structure, plan and manage individual and group projects and activities.

4. Programme structure

4.1    Part A - Introductory Modules

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
MAA306 Mathematics for Manufacturing Engineering 20 1+2 C
WSA102 Engineering Science 1 20 1+2 C
WSA604 Materials & Manufacturing Processes 20 1+2 C
WSA400 Application of CAD for Engineering Designers 10 1 C
WSA501 Integrating Studies 1a 10 1 C
WSA610 Manufacturing Technology 10 1 C
WSA210 Manufacturing Management 10 2 C
WSA504 Integrating Studies 1b 10 2 C
WSA900 Electronics and Electrical Technology 1 10 2 C

 
4.2 Part B  - Degree Modules

 

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSB501 Integrating Studies 20 1+2 C
WSB600 Manufacturing Process Technology 20 1+2 C
WSB112 Engineering Science 2 10 1 C
WSB310 Engineering and Management Modelling  10 1 C
WSB201 Digital Manufacturing and Discrete Event Simulation 10 1 C
WSB505 Manufacturing Design 10 1 C
MAB206 Statistics 10 2 C
WSB203 Manufacturing Planning and Control 10 2 C
WSB301 Software Engineering 10 2 C
WSB413 Machine Design 10 2 C

      

4.3    Part I – Optional Placement Year

 

Code Title
WSI010 Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (non-credit bearing)
WSI020 Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (non-credit bearing)
WSI035 Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) (non-credit bearing)

 

For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.

 

4.4 Part C - Degree Modules  


Students MUST choose 20 credits of options (O) in Semester One and 20 credits in Semester Two.

TWO modules (20 credits) must be selected from Groups A, B or C with no more than ONE module from each group.

TWO modules (20 credits) must be selected from Groups D, E, F or G with no more than ONE module from each group.

 

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSC500 Individual Project 40 1+2 C
WSC200 Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality 10 1 C
WSC600 Advanced Manufacturing Processes and Technology 1 10 1 C
WSC602 Sustainable Manufacturing 10 1 C
WSD203 Lean Operations and Supply Chain Management 10 2 C
WSC606 Additive Manufacturing for Product Development 10 1 OA
WSC201 Organisation Structure & Strategy 10 1 OB
WSC205 International Project Management 10 1 OB
WSC400 Design for Assembly 10 1 OB
WSC108 Manufacturing Automation and Control 10 1 OC
WSC206 Product Innovation Management 10 2 OD
WSC300 Product Information Systems - Computer Aided Design 10 2 OD
WSC603 Metrology 10 2 OE
WSC911 Industrial Machine Vision 10 2 OE
WSC610 Healthcare Engineering 10 2 OF
WSC700 Sports Engineering 10 2 OF
WSC106 Finite Element Analysis 10 2 OG
MPC012 Polymer Engineering : Processing and Manufacture 10 2 OG

 All module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

4.5  Studies Overseas

Students may choose to study Part C - Semester One at an approved Overseas Higher Education Institution.  The Mix of subjects of the learning programme must be approved in advance by the Programme Director.

The proposed programme of learning will normally include work on an individual project with a modular weight of 10 credits.

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

In order to progress from Part A to Part B, and from Part B to Part C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.

 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and Part C, in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX.  The overall average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 40: Part C 60, to determine the degree classification.

Programme Specification

MM BEng (Hons) Manufacturing Engineering (Students undertaking Part C in 2019)

Academic Year: 2019/20

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)
Institution of Mechanical Engineers (IMechE)

Final award BEng/ BEng +DIS /BEng + DIntS/ BEng + DPS
Programme title Manufacturing Engineering
Programme code WSUB01
Length of programme The duration of the programme is 6 semesters, or 8 semesters if students undertake the additional period of study, normally between Parts B and C, leading to the award of the Diploma in Industrial Studies, the Diploma of International Studies or the Diploma of Professional Studies.
UCAS code H710, HH1T
Admissions criteria

BEng - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/h710

BEng + DIntS/DPS - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/hh1t

 

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The overall aim of this programme is to develop students with core knowledge, skills and attributes able to work effectively and progress rapidly in manufacturing industries. This is undertaken through taught courses that cover the essential engineering and management disciplines supported by practical and transferable skills development.

Specific aims are:    

•      A1.   To produce engineering graduates ready to play a substantial role in manufacturing companies through a combination of technical, commercial and social awareness.

•      A2.   To provide a foundation for graduates wishing to progress to professional engineering status.

•      A3.   To deliver core subjects in engineering science, mathematics, manufacturing processes and technologies that underpin a career in manufacturing engineering.

•      A4.   To provide a high quality educational experience for students in a programme of study which combines wide ranging aspects of manufacturing technologies, manufacturing management, design for manufacture and engineering design

•      A5.   To develop analytical and transferable skills that will enable graduates to solve problems individually and in teams, and gain employment in a wide variety of professions, and thereby make a valuable contribution to society and wealth creation.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015). 

  • Engineering Council (UK). ‘UK-SPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan.2014. 

  • Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014. 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:

  • K1.   The underpinning science, mathematics and other disciplines associated with a career in manufacturing engineering;
  • K2.   Engineering principles, quantitative methods, mathematical and computer models;
  • K3.   Codes of practice, industry standards and quality issues applicable to a career in manufacturing engineering;
  • K4.   Management techniques to organise manufacturing engineering activities and an understanding of the commercial and economic context of an engineering business;
  • K5.   The importance of sustainable development, legal, ethical and intellectual property issues within the modern industrial world;
  • K6.   The characteristics of engineering materials, manufacturing processes and technologies.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • C1.   Identify a manufacturing related problem, evaluate its requirements and generate innovative solutions that consider a range of constraints including production capabilities, sustainability and economics;
  • C2.   Apply appropriate methods (including analytical and computational methods) to model and assess such solutions;
  • C3.   Apply mathematical and scientific methods to the analysis of manufacturing related problems making appropriate allowance for uncertainty in the available data;
  • C4.   Appreciate the role and constraints of engineers in other disciplines.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • P1.   Use appropriate computer software and computational techniques;
  • P2.   Use appropriate laboratory and mechanical workshop equipment competently and safely;
  • P3.   Research information relating to manufacturing technologies and their management;
  • P4.   Prepare engineering drawings and technical reports and give technical presentations;
  • P5.   Demonstrate organisational and management skills.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • T1.   Apply creative and structured approaches to problem solving;
  • T2.   Gather and collate key technical information from a range of sources;
  • T3.   Communicate effectively through written, graphical, interpersonal and presentation skills;
  • T4.   Operate and apply a range of computer based information systems;
  • T5.   Monitor and adjust a personal programme of work on an on-going basis and learn independently;
  • T6.   Work in a team and understand the different roles;
  • T7.   Structure, plan and manage individual and group projects and activities.

4. Programme structure

4.1    Part A - Introductory Modules

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
MAA306 Mathematics for Manufacturing Engineering 20 1+2 C
MMA102 Engineering Science 1 20 1+2 C
MMA604 Materials & Manufacturing Processes 20 1+2 C
MMA400 Manufacturing Design 1 10 1 C
MMA501 Integrating Studies 1a 10 1 C
MMB610 Manufacturing Technology 10 1 C
MMA210 Manufacturing Management 10 2 C
MMA504 Integrating Studies 1b 10 2 C
MMA900 Electronics and Electrical Technology 1 10 2 C

 
4.2 Part B  - Degree Modules

 

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSB501 Integrating Studies 20 1+2 C
WSB600 Manufacturing Process Technology 20 1+2 C
WSB112 Engineering Science 2 10 1 C
WSB310 Engineering and Management Modelling  10 1 C
WSB200 Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality 10 1 C
WSB505 Manufacturing Design 10 1 C
MAB206 Statistics 10 2 C
WSB203 Manufacturing Planning and Control 10 2 C
WSB301 Software Engineering 10 2 C
WSB413 Machine Design 10 2 C

      

4.3    Part I – Optional Placement Year

 

Code Title
WSI010 DIS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing)
WSI020 DPS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing)
WSI035 DIntS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing)


For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.

 

4.4 Part C - Degree Modules  


Students MUST choose 20 credits of options (O) in Semester One and 20 credits in Semester Two.

TWO modules (20 credits) must be selected from Groups A, B or C with no more than ONE module from each group.

TWO modules (20 credits) must be selected from Groups D, E, F OR G with no more than ONE module from each group.

 

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSC500 Individual Project 40 1+2 C
WSC205 International Project Management 10 1 C
WSC600 Advanced Manufacturing Processes and Technology 1 10 1 C
WSC602 Sustainable Manufacturing 10 1 C
WSD203 Lean Operations and Supply Chain Management 10 2 C
WSC606 Additive Manufacturing for Product Development 10 1 OA
WSC201 Organisation Structure and Strategy 10 1 OB
WSC400 Design for Assembly 10 1 OB
WSC108 Manufacturing Automation and Control 10 1 OC
WSC300 Product Information Systems - Computer Aided Design 10 2 OD
WSC206 Product Innovation Management 10 2 OD
WSC603 Metrology 10 2 OE
WSC911 Industrial Machine Vision 10 2 OE
WSC610 Healthcare Engineering 10 2 OF
WSC700 Sports Engineering 10 2 OF
WSC106 Finite Element Analysis 10 2 OG
MPC012 Polymer Engineering : Processing and Manufacture 10 2 OG

 

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

4.5  Studies Overseas

Students may choose to study Part C - Semester One at an approved Overseas Higher Education Institution.  The Mix of subjects of the learning programme must be approved in advance by the Programme Director.

The proposed programme of learning will normally include work on an individual project with a modular weight of 10 credits.

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

In order to progress from Part A to Part B, and from Part B to Part C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and Part C, in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX.  The overall average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 40: Part C 60, to determine the degree classification.

Programme Specification

MM BEng (Hons) Product Design Engineering (2018 and 2019 Entry)

Academic Year: 2019/20

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)

Institution of Mechanical Engineers (IMechE)

Institution of Engineering Designers (IED)

Final award BEng/ BEng + DIS/BEng + DPS/ BEng + DInts
Programme title Product Design Engineering
Programme code WSUB02
Length of programme The duration of the programme is 6 semesters, or 8 semesters if students undertake the additional period of study, normally between Parts B and C, leading to the award of the Diploma in Industrial Studies, the Diploma of International Studies, or the Diploma of Professional Studies.
UCAS code H715 / HH1R
Admissions criteria

BEng - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/hh1r

BEng + DPS/DInts - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/h715

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

This programme seeks to provide a fully accredited engineering degree course that bridges the disciplines of mechanical engineering, manufacturing engineering and product design.

The design content is interdisciplinary and applicable to products, processes and systems. It aims to support the acquisition of design engineering skills and provide an integrating theme to develop goal-directed thinking and problem-solving strategies applicable to a wide range of problems.

•    A1.   To deliver systematic knowledge and understanding of key aspects of engineering science, manufacturing engineering, innovation and appropriate management techniques.

•    A2.   To provide opportunities for students to develop appropriate design and project engineering skills.

•    A3.   To develop the ability to solve engineering problems, some complex, using contemporary ideas and techniques.

•    A4.   To enable students to manage their own learning, communicate effectively and make use of primary source materials.

•    A5.   To gain knowledge of human and project management theory.

•    A6.   To provide insight into engineering practice and commercial aspects of engineering.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015). 

  • Engineering Council (UK). ‘UK-SPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan.2014. 

  • Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014. 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:

  • K1.   the underpinning science, mathematics and other disciplines associated with careers related to product design and manufacturing engineering;
  • K2.   engineering principles, quantitative methods, mathematical and computer models;
  • K3.   the design process and design methodologies;
  • K4.   codes of practice, industry standards and quality issues as applicable to a career in product design engineering;
  • K5.   management techniques and business practices and of the commercial and economic context of an engineering business;
  • K6.   intellectual property issues and of environmental, legal and ethical issues within the modern industrial world;
  • K7.   the characteristics of engineering materials, equipment and processes and an awareness of basic mechanical workshop practices.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • C1.   define a design engineering problem and generate innovative solutions;
  • C2.   interpret numerical data and apply mathematical methods to the analysis of engineering design problems;
  • C3.   analyse, objectively evaluate and apply the principles of industrial design, engineering design and manufacturing design to product design and development;
  • C4.   demonstrate an awareness of form, function, fit, environment and safety as applied to design and manufacture;
  • C5.   show initiative, innovation and intellect in problem solving.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • P1.   manage the design process taking account of customer constraints such as cost, health and safety, risk and environmental issues;
  • P2.   use appropriate computer software and laboratory equipment;
  • P3.   research information, generate and evaluate product design ideas;
  • P4.   communicate product design ideas through the presentation of concept drawings, computer visualisations and conventional sketching;
  • P5.   prepare engineering drawings, computer visualisations and technical reports and give technically competent oral presentations;
  • P6.   demonstrate an understanding of manufacturing technology in relation to design and production;
  • P7.   demonstrate basic organisational and management skills.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • T1.   demonstrate a high level of numeracy;
  • T2.   apply creative and structured approaches to problem solving;
  • T3.   communicate effectively through written, graphical, interpersonal and presentation skills;
  • T4.   design and implement basic computer-based information systems;
  • T5.   work independently;
  • T6.   work in a team;
  • T7.   organise and manage time and resources effectively.

4. Programme structure

4.1    Part A - Introductory Modules

 

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
MAA306 Mathematics for Manufacturing Engineering 20 1+2 C
WSA102 Engineering Science 1 20 1+2 C
WSA401 Product Design (Ergonomics and Visualisation) 20 1+2 C
WSA604 Materials and Manufacturing Processes 20 1+2 C
WSA400 Application of CAD for Engineering Designers 10 1 C
WSA501 Integrating Studies 1a 10 1 C
WSA504 Integrating Studies 1b 10 2 C
WSA900 Electronic and Electrical Technology 1 10 2 C

                

4.2    Part B - Degree Modules 

 

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSB501 Integrating Studies 20 1+2 C
WSB504 Application of Product Design 20 1+2 C
WSB112 Engineering Science 2 10 1 C
WSB310 Engineering and Management Modelling 10 1 C
WSB400 Industrial Design 10 1 C
WSB610 Manufacturing Technology 10 1 C
MAB206 Statistics 10 2 C
WSB210 Manufacturing Management 10 2 C
WSB301 Software Engineering 10 2 C
WSB413 Machine Design 10 2 C

 

4.3    Part I – Optional Placement Year 

 

Code Title
WSI010 Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (non-credit bearing)
WSI020 Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (non-credit bearing)
WSI035 Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIntS) (non-credit bearing)

 

For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.

  

4.4    Part C - Degree Modules

Students MUST choose 20 credits of optional modules (O) in Semester One.

Students MUST choose 30 credits of optional modules (O) in Semester Two, with no more than 10 credits from each group. 

 

Code  Title   Weight Semester C/O 
WSC501 Individual Project 40 1+2 C
WSC200 Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality 10 1 C
WSC205 International Project Management 10 1 C
WSC602 Sustainable Manufacturing 10 1 C
WSC201 Organisational Structure & Strategy 10 1 O
WSC400 Design for Assembly 10 1 O
WSC401 Design Methods and Communication 10 1 O
WSC600 Advanced Manufacturing Processes and Technology 1 10 1 O
WSC606 Additive Manufacturing for Product Development 10 1 O
WSC106 Finite Element Analysis 10 2 OA
MPC012 Polymer Engineering - Processes and Manufacture 10 2 OA
WSC203 Manufacturing Planning & Control 10 2 OB
WSC206 Product Innovation Management 10 2 OB
WSC300 Product Information Systems - Computer Aided Design 10 2 OC
WSC603 Metrology 10 2 OC
WSC610 Healthcare Engineering 10 2 OD
WSC700 Sports Engineering 10 2 OD
WSC911 Industrial Machine Vision 10 2 OE

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

4.5    Study Overseas 

Students may choose to study Part C – Semester 1 at an approved Overseas Higher Education Institution.  The mix of subjects of the learning programme must be approved in advance by the Programme Director.  The proposed programme of learning will normally include work on an Individual Project with a modular weight of 10.

 

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

In order to progress from Part A to Part B, and from Part B to Part C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.

 

 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Part B and Part C, in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX.  The overall average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 40: Part C 60, to determine the degree classification.

Programme Specification

MM BEng (Hons) Product Design Engineering (Students undertaking Part C in 2019)

Academic Year: 2019/20

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)

Institution of Mechanical Engineers (IMechE)

Institution of Engineering Designers (IED)

Final award BEng/ BEng + DIS/BEng + DPS/ BEng + DInts
Programme title Product Design Engineering
Programme code WSUB02
Length of programme The duration of the programme is 6 semesters, or 8 semesters if students undertake the additional period of study, normally between Parts B and C, leading to the award of the Diploma in Industrial Studies, the Diploma of International Studies, or the Diploma of Professional Studies.
UCAS code H715 / HH1R
Admissions criteria

BEng - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/hh1r

BEng + DPS/DInts - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/h715

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

This programme seeks to provide a fully accredited engineering degree course that bridges the disciplines of mechanical engineering, manufacturing engineering and product design.

The design content is interdisciplinary and applicable to products, processes and systems. It aims to support the acquisition of design engineering skills and provide an integrating theme to develop goal-directed thinking and problem-solving strategies applicable to a wide range of problems.

•    A1.   To deliver systematic knowledge and understanding of key aspects of engineering science, manufacturing engineering, innovation and appropriate management techniques.

•    A2.   To provide opportunities for students to develop appropriate design and project engineering skills.

•    A3.   To develop the ability to solve engineering problems, some complex, using contemporary ideas and techniques.

•    A4.   To enable students to manage their own learning, communicate effectively and make use of primary source materials.

•    A5.   To gain knowledge of human and project management theory.

•    A6.   To provide insight into engineering practice and commercial aspects of engineering.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015). 

  • Engineering Council (UK). ‘UK-SPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan.2014. 

  • Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014. 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:

  • K1.   the underpinning science, mathematics and other disciplines associated with careers related to product design and manufacturing engineering;
  • K2.   engineering principles, quantitative methods, mathematical and computer models;
  • K3.   the design process and design methodologies;
  • K4.   codes of practice, industry standards and quality issues as applicable to a career in product design engineering;
  • K5.   management techniques and business practices and of the commercial and economic context of an engineering business;
  • K6.   intellectual property issues and of environmental, legal and ethical issues within the modern industrial world;
  • K7.   the characteristics of engineering materials, equipment and processes and an awareness of basic mechanical workshop practices.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • C1.   define a design engineering problem and generate innovative solutions;
  • C2.   interpret numerical data and apply mathematical methods to the analysis of engineering design problems;
  • C3.   analyse, objectively evaluate and apply the principles of industrial design, engineering design and manufacturing design to product design and development;
  • C4.   demonstrate an awareness of form, function, fit, environment and safety as applied to design and manufacture;
  • C5.   show initiative, innovation and intellect in problem solving.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • P1.   manage the design process taking account of customer constraints such as cost, health and safety, risk and environmental issues;
  • P2.   use appropriate computer software and laboratory equipment;
  • P3.   research information, generate and evaluate product design ideas;
  • P4.   communicate product design ideas through the presentation of concept drawings, computer visualisations and conventional sketching;
  • P5.   prepare engineering drawings, computer visualisations and technical reports and give technically competent oral presentations;
  • P6.   demonstrate an understanding of manufacturing technology in relation to design and production;
  • P7.   demonstrate basic organisational and management skills.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • T1.   demonstrate a high level of numeracy;
  • T2.   apply creative and structured approaches to problem solving;
  • T3.   communicate effectively through written, graphical, interpersonal and presentation skills;
  • T4.   design and implement basic computer-based information systems;
  • T5.   work independently;
  • T6.   work in a team;
  • T7.   organise and manage time and resources effectively.

4. Programme structure

4.1    Part A - Introductory Modules

 

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
MAA306 Mathematics for Manufacturing Engineering 20 1+2 C
MMA102 Engineering Science 1 20 1+2 C
MMA401 Product Design (Ergonomics & Visualisation) 20 1+2 C
MMA604 Materials and Manufacturing Processes 20 1+2 C
MMA400 Manufacturing Design 1 10 1 C
MMA501 Integrating Studies 1a 10 1 C
MMA504 Integrating Studies 1b 10 2 C
MMA900 Electronic and Electrical Technology 1 10 2 C

                

4.2    Part B - Degree Modules 

 

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSB501 Integrating Studies 20 1+2 C
WSB504 Application of Product Design 20 1+2 C
WSB112 Engineering Science 2 10 1 C
WSB310 Engineering and Management Modelling 10 1 C
WSB400 Industrial Design 10 1 C
WSB610 Manufacturing Technology 10 1 C
MAB206 Statistics 10 2 C
WSB210 Manufacturing Management 10 2 C
WSB301 Software Engineering 10 2 C
WSB413 Machine Design 10 2 C

 

4.3    Part I – Optional Placement Year 

 

Code Title
WSI010 DIS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing)
WSI020 DPS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing)
WSI035 DIntS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing)

 

For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.

 

4.4    Part C - Degree Modules

Students MUST choose 20 credits of optional modules (O) in Semester One.

Students MUST choose 30 credits of optional modules (O) in Semester Two, with no more than 10 credits from each group. 

 

Code  Title   Weight Semester C/O 
WSC501 Individual Project 40 1+2 C
WSC200 Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality 10 1 C
WSC205 International Project Management 10 1 C
WSC602 Sustainable Manufacturing 10 1 C
WSC201 Organisational Structure & Strategy 10 1 O
WSC400 Design for Assembly 10 1 O
WSC401 Design Methods and Communication 10 1 O
WSC600 Advanced Manufacturing Processes and Technology 1 10 1 O
WSC606 Additive Manufacturing for Product Development 10 1 O
WSC106 Finite Element Analysis 10 2 OA
MPC012 Polymer Engineering - Processes and Manufacture 10 2 OA
WSC203 Manufacturing Planning & Control 10 2 OB
WSC206 Product Innovation Management 10 2 OB
WSC300 Product Information Systems - Computer Aided Design 10 2 OC
WSC603 Metrology 10 2 OC
WSC610 Healthcare Engineering 10 2 OD
WSC700 Sports Engineering 10 2 OD
WSC911 Industrial Machine Vision 10 2 OE

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

 

4.5    Study Overseas 

Students may choose to study Part C – Semester 1 at an approved Overseas Higher Education Institution.  The mix of subjects of the learning programme must be approved in advance by the Programme Director.  The proposed programme of learning will normally include work on an Individual Project with a modular weight of 10.

 

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

In order to progress from Part A to Part B, and from Part B to Part C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.

 

 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Part B and Part C, in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX.  The overall average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 40: Part C 60, to determine the degree classification.

Programme Specification

MM BEng (Hons) Mechanical Engineering (2018 and 2019 Entry)

Academic Year: 2019/20

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)

Institution of Mechanical Engineers (IMechE)

Final award BEng /BEng DIS/BEng DPS /BEng DInts
Programme title Mechanical Engineering
Programme code WSUB03
Length of programme The duration of the programme is either 6 semesters, or 8 semesters if the students undertake the additional period of study, normally between Parts B and C, for the award of the Diploma of Industrial Studies, the Diploma of International Studies or the Diploma of Professional Studies.
UCAS code H300, H301
Admissions criteria

BEng - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/h300

 

 

BEng + DPS/DInts - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/h301

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

This fully accredited degree programme delivers the technical and business skills that are required for a successful career as a professional mechanical engineer. The curriculum has been designed to meet the needs of industry; providing a strong academic foundation while inspiring students to be creative and communicate their ideas clearly by way of industrially based design projects. On completion of the programme, students will have acquired a broad base of engineering knowledge and experience.  They will be self-reliant and able to contribute productively in team situations. The programme provides the flexibility for students to choose a wide variety of career paths and specialisms in their final year.

Aims:

  • A1.  To prepare highly skilled graduates to pursue careers in Mechanical Engineering across a range of industries and activities including design, development, and analysis of complex systems;
  • A2.  To provide a high quality learning experience across a complete range of core subjects in order to give students the necessary technical skills to understand mechanical systems and solve engineering problems;
  • A3.  To promote high quality engineering practice by applying appropriate knowledge, skills, tools and techniques in the analysis, diagnosis and solution of industry-related problems;
  • A4.  To develop engineers capable of designing systems and managing the development process in order to deliver solutions that meet the requirements of customers;
  • A5.  To impart an appreciation of the essential practical and commercial, ethical, business, sustainability and legal constraints of professional engineering;
  • A6.  To support personal and professional development and foster creativity, develop design capability and teach the communication skills necessary to put ideas into practice.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015) 
  • Engineering Council (UK). ‘UK-SPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan.2014 
  • Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014 

 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:

  • K1.   The underpinning scientific mathematical and engineering principles associated  with mechanical engineering;
  • K2.   The characteristics of engineering material, equipment and processes and an awareness of basic mechanical workshop practices;
  • K3.   Engineering principles, quantitative methods, mathematical and computer models;
  • K4.   Relevant codes of Practice and regulatory framework and operational practices for sale, operation of engineering processes;
  • K5.   Recognise the professional and ethical responsibilities of engineers;
  • K6.   Principles of industrial design, engineering design and manufacturing design;
  • K7.   Management techniques and an understanding of the commercial and economic context of the engineering business;

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • C1.   Use the principles of engineering science in developing solutions to practical mechanical engineering problems;
  • C2.   Create new engineering components and processes through the synthesis of ideas from a range of sources using appropriate design principles, techniques and codes of practice;
  • C3.   Integrate, evaluate and make use of information from a wide variety of sources including other engineering disciplines;
  • C4.   Investigate and define engineering problems within the framework of economic, social, ethical and environmental issues and show the ability to assess risk;
  • C5.   Evaluate and respond to customer needs, including fitness for purpose and cost.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • P1.   Apply computer-based and mathematical methods to the modelling and analysis of engineering systems, components and products;
  • P2.   Define and solve practical engineering problems;
  • P3.   Use laboratory and basic workshop equipment in an appropriate and safe manner;
  • P4.   Demonstrate the ability to manage the design process;
  • P5.   Prepare mechanical engineering drawings, computer graphics and technical reports and give technically competent oral presentations;
  • P6.   Apply relevant codes of practice and industry standards;
  • P7.   Demonstrate the ability to work with technical uncertainty;
  • P8.   Demonstrate basic organisational and project management skills.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • T1.   Demonstrate a high level of numeracy;
  • T2.   Search and retrieve information, ideas and data from a variety of sources;
  • T3.   Select and analyse appropriate engineering techniques and tools;
  • T4.   Communicate effectively by means of technical reports, papers, graphical aids, interpersonal and presentation skills;
  • T5.   Design and implement basic computer based information systems;
  • T6.   Develop work plans, take responsibility for its execution, organise and manage time and resources effectively;
  • T7.   Plan self-learning and improve performance, as the foundation for lifelong learning/CPD.

4. Programme structure

4.1    Part A - Introductory Modules

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
MAA310 Mathematics for Mechanical Engineering 20 1+2 C
WSA101 Statics and Dynamics 20 1+2 C
WSA508 Engineering Principles and Professional Skills 20 1+2 C
WSA604 Materials and Manufacturing Processes 20 1+2 C
WSA800 Thermodynamics and Fluid Mechanics 20 1+2 C
WSA901 Electronic Systems for Mechanical Processes 10 1 C
WSA100 Mechanics of Materials 10 2 C

 
4.2 Part B  - Degree Modules

 

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSB300 Engineering Computation 10 1+2 C
WSB500 Application of Engineering Design: Industry Based Project  10 1+2 C
MAB110 Mathematics for Mechanical Engineering 3 10 1 C
WSB100 Mechanics of Materials 2 10 1 C
WSB101 Engineering Dynamics 2 10 1 C
WSB104 Control Engineering 10 1 C
WSB800 Thermodynamics 2 10 1 C
WSB045 Electrical Power & Machines 10 2 C
WSB403 Design of Machine Elements 10 2 C
WSB404 Computer Aided Design, Manufacture and Test (CADMAT) 10 2 C
WSB801 Heat Transfer 10 2 C
WSB802 Fluid Mechanics 2 10 2 C

      

4.3    Part I – Optional Placement Year

 

Code Title
WSI010 Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (non-credit bearing)
WSI020 Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (non-credit bearing)
WSI035 Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) (non-credit bearing)

 

For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.

 

4.4 Part C - Degree Modules  


Students MUST choose 20 credits of options (O) in Semester One and 30 credits in Semester Two.

TWO modules (20 credits) must be selected from Group A or Group B (both from the same group), OR ONE module from Group A or B and ONE module from Group C.

TWO or THREE modules (total 30 credits) must be selected from Group D, E, F or G.  No more than ONE module must be selected from each group. 

 

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSC500 Individual Project 40 1+2 C
WSC200 Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality 10 1 C
WSC504 Applied Engineering Design & Analysis 10 1 C
WSC900 Computer Control and Instrumentation 10 1 C
WSC801 Advanced Heat Transfer 10 1 OA
WSC804 Energy Systems Analysis 10 1 OA
WSC910 Laser Materials Processing 10 1 OA
WSC104 Robotics and Control 10 1 OB
WSC107 Contacts Mechanics: Tribology 10 1 OB
WSC602 Sustainable Manufacturing 10 1 OC
WSC606 Additive Manufacturing for Product Development 10 1 OC
WSC106 Finite Element Analysis 10 2 OD
WSC802 Computation Fluid Dynamics 10 2 OD
MPC012 Polymer Engineering - Processing & Manufacture 10 2 OD
WSC101 Vibration and Noise 10 2 OE
WSC105 Kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery 10 2 OE
MPC014 Materials in Service 10 2 OF
WSC301 Computer Aided Engineering 10 2 OF
WSC800 Internal Combustion Engines 20 2 OF
WSC803 Ballistics and Rocket Propulsion 10 2 OF
MPC102 Fracture and Failure 10 2 OF
WSC911 Industrial Machine Vision 10 2 OG

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

 

4.5  Studies Overseas

Students may choose to study Semester 1 (only) during their Part D, at an approved Overseas Higher Education Institution.  The mix of subjects of the learning programme must first be approved by the programme director for their course.  An acceptable learning programme should, where possible, include a group project and studies at an advanced/masters level. 

 

                      

 

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to Part C and be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.

 

 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and Part C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX.  The average percentage marks for each part will be combined in the ratio Part B - 40 : Part C - 60 to determine the degree classification.

Programme Specification

MM BEng (Hons) Mechanical Engineering (Students undertaking Part C in 2019)

Academic Year: 2019/20

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)

Institution of Mechanical Engineers (IMechE)

Final award BEng /BEng DIS/BEng DPS /BEng DInts
Programme title Mechanical Engineering
Programme code WSUB03
Length of programme The duration of the programme is either 6 semesters, or 8 semesters if the students undertake the additional period of study, normally between Parts B and C, for the award of the Diploma of Industrial Studies, the Diploma of International Studies or the Diploma of Professional Studies.
UCAS code H300, H301
Admissions criteria

BEng - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/h300

BEng + DPS/DInts - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/h301

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

This fully accredited degree programme delivers the technical and business skills that are required for a successful career as a professional mechanical engineer. The curriculum has been designed to meet the needs of industry; providing a strong academic foundation while inspiring students to be creative and communicate their ideas clearly by way of industrially based design projects. On completion of the programme, students will have acquired a broad base of engineering knowledge and experience.  They will be self-reliant and able to contribute productively in team situations. The programme provides the flexibility for students to choose a wide variety of career paths and specialisms in their final year.

Aims:

  • A1.   To prepare highly skilled graduates to pursue careers in Mechanical Engineering across a range of industries and activities including design, development, and analysis of complex systems;

  • A2.   To provide a high quality learning experience across a complete range of core subjects in order to give students the necessary technical skills to understand mechanical systems and solve engineering problems;

  • A3.   To promote high quality engineering practice by applying appropriate knowledge, skills, tools and techniques in the analysis, diagnosis and solution of industry-related problems;

  • A4.   To develop engineers capable of designing systems and managing the development process in order to deliver solutions that meet the requirements of customers;

  • A5.   To impart an appreciation of the essential practical and commercial, ethical, business, sustainability and legal constraints of professional engineering;

  • A6.   To support personal and professional development and foster creativity, develop design capability and teach the communication skills necessary to put ideas into practice.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015). 
  • Engineering Council (UK). ‘UK-SPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan.2014 
  • Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014 

 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:

  • K1.   The underpinning scientific mathematical and engineering principles associated  with mechanical engineering;
  • K2.   The characteristics of engineering material, equipment and processes and an awareness of basic mechanical workshop practices;
  • K3.   Engineering principles, quantitative methods, mathematical and computer models;
  • K4.   Relevant codes of Practice and regulatory framework and operational practices for sale, operation of engineering processes;
  • K5.   Recognise the professional and ethical responsibilities of engineers;
  • K6.   Principles of industrial design, engineering design and manufacturing design;
  • K7.   Management techniques and an understanding of the commercial and economic context of the engineering business.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • C1.   Use the principles of engineering science in developing solutions to practical mechanical engineering problems;
  • C2.   Create new engineering components and processes through the synthesis of ideas from a range of sources using appropriate design principles, techniques and codes of practice;
  • C3.   Integrate, evaluate and make use of information from a wide variety of sources including other engineering disciplines;
  • C4.   Investigate and define engineering problems within the framework of economic, social, ethical and environmental issues and show the ability to assess risk;
  • C5.   Evaluate and respond to customer needs, including fitness for purpose and cost.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • P1.   Apply computer-based and mathematical methods to the modelling and analysis of engineering systems, components and products;
  • P2.   Define and solve practical engineering problems;
  • P3.   Use laboratory and basic workshop equipment in an appropriate and safe manner;
  • P4.   Demonstrate the ability to manage the design process;
  • P5.   Prepare mechanical engineering drawings, computer graphics and technical reports and give technically competent oral presentations;
  • P6.   Apply relevant codes of practice and industry standards;
  • P7.   Demonstrate the ability to work with technical uncertainty;
  • P8.   Demonstrate basic organisational and project management skills.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • T1.   Demonstrate a high level of numeracy;
  • T2.   Search and retrieve information, ideas and data from a variety of sources;
  • T3.   Select and analyse appropriate engineering techniques and tools;
  • T4.   Communicate effectively by means of technical reports, papers, graphical aids, interpersonal and presentation skills;
  • T5.   Design and implement basic computer based information systems;
  • T6.   Develop work plans, take responsibility for its execution, organise and manage time and resources effectively;
  • T7.   Plan self-learning and improve performance, as the foundation for lifelong learning/CPD.

4. Programme structure

4.1    Part A - Introductory Modules

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
MAA310 Mathematics for Mechanical Engineering 20 1+2 C
MMA101 Statics and Dynamics 20 1+2 C
MMA508 Engineering Principles & Professional Skills 20 1+2 C
MMA604 Materials & Manufacturing Processes 20 1+2 C
MMA800 Thermodynamics and Fluid Mechanics 20 1+2 C
MMA901 Electronic Systems for Mechanical Processes 10 1 C
MMA100 Mechanics of Materials 10 2 C

 
4.2 Part B  - Degree Modules

 

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSB300 Engineering Computation 10 1+2 C
WSB500 Application of Engineering Design: Industry Based Project  10 1+2 C
MAB110 Mathematics for Mechanical Engineering 10 1 C
WSB100 Mechanics of Materials 2 10 1 C
WSB101 Engineering Dynamics 2 10 1 C
WSB104 Control Engineering 10 1 C
WSB800 Thermodynamics 2 10 1 C
WSB045 Electrical Power & Machines 10 2 C
WSB403 Design of Machine Elements 10 2 C
WSB404 Computer Aided Design, Manufacture and Test (CADMAT) 10 2 C
WSB801 Heat Transfer 10 2 C
WSB802 Fluid Mechanics 10 2 C

      

4.3    Part I – Optional Placement Year

 

Code Title
WSI010 DIS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing)
WSI020 DPS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing)
WSI035 DIntS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing)

 

For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.

 

4.4 Part C - Degree Modules  


Students MUST choose 20 credits of options (O) in Semester One and 30 credits in Semester Two.

TWO modules (20 credits) must be selected from Group A or Group B (both from the same group), OR ONE module from Group A or B and ONE module from Group C.

TWO or THREE modules (total 30 credits) must be selected from Group D, E, F or G.  No more than ONE module must be selected from each group. 

 

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSC500 Individual Project 40 1+2 C
WSC200 Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality 10 1 C
WSC504 Applied Engineering Design & Analysis 10 1 C
WSC900 Computer Control and Instrumentation 10 1 C
WSC801 Advanced Heat Transfer 10 1 OA
WSC804 Energy Systems Analysis 10 1 OA
WSC910 Laser Materials Processing 10 1 OA
WSC104 Robotics and Control 10 1 OB
WSC107 Contacts Mechanics: Tribology 10 1 OB
WSC602 Sustainable Manufacturing 10 1 OC
WSC606 Additive Manufacturing for Product Development 10 1 OC
WSC106 Finite Element Analysis 10 2 OD
WSC802 Computation Fluid Dynamics 1 10 2 OD
MPC012 Polymer Engineering - Processing & Manufacture 10 2 OD
WSC101 Vibration and Noise 10 2 OE
WSC105 Kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery 10 2 OE
MPC014 Materials in Service 10 2 OF
WSC301 Computer Aided Engineering 10 2 OF
WSC800 Internal Combustion Engines 20 2 OF
WSC803 Ballistics and Rocket Propulsion 10 2 OF
MPC102 Fracture and Failure 10 2 OF
WSC911 Industrial Machine Vision 10 2 OG

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

4.5  Studies Overseas

Students may choose to study Semester 1 (only) during their Part D, at an approved Overseas Higher Education Institution.  The mix of subjects of the learning programme must first be approved by the programme director for their course.  An acceptable learning programme should, where possible, include a group project and studies at an advanced/masters level. 

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to Part C and be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.

 

 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and Part C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX.  The average percentage marks for each part will be combined in the ratio Part B - 40 : Part C - 60 to determine the degree classification.

Programme Specification

MM BEng (Hons) Engineering Management (2018 and 2019 Entry)

Academic Year: 2019/20

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)

Institution of Mechanical Engineers (IMechE)

Final award BEng / BEng + DPS / BEng + DIS / BEng + DInts
Programme title Engineering Management
Programme code WSUB04
Length of programme The duration of the programme is 6 semesters, or 8 semesters if students undertake the additional period of study, between Parts B and C, leading to the award of the Diploma of Industrial Studies, Diploma of Professional Studies or the Diploma of International Studies.
UCAS code N290/N291
Admissions criteria

BSc - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/n290

BSc + DPS/DIntS - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/n291

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

This programme is aimed at:

  • A1.   Educating engineering management graduates ready to play a substantial role in industrial  companies through a substantive base of knowledge and understanding at the forefront of the discipline of engineering and manufacturing.
  • A2.   Providing a foundation for graduates wishing to progress to professional engineering management status.
  • A3.   Providing a high quality educational experience for students in a programme of study which combines wide ranging aspects of engineering design and technologies, management models and methodologies, marketing, finance, and business in engineering.
  • A4.   Preparing graduates to apply organisational and project management, team building, and leadership skills in engineering.
  • A5.   Developing analytical and transferable skills that will enable graduates to gain employment in a wide variety of professional roles and to take an ethical approach in making a valuable contribution to society.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015). 

  • Engineering Council (UK). ‘UK-SPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan.2014. 

  • Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014. 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:

  • K1.   the engineering principles and their application to the analysis of key engineering processes;
  • K2.   the application of quantitative, analytical, modelling and computational methods in order to identify, classify and describe the performance of systems and components and to solve engineering problems and to implement appropriate actions;
  • K3.   the requirement for engineering activities to promote sustainable development and the application of quantitative techniques where appropriate;
  • K4.   working with information that may be incomplete or uncertain and quantify the effect of this on the design;
  • K5.   the evaluation of business, customer and user needs, including considerations such as the wider engineering context, public perception and aesthetics;
  • K6.   the engineering and business problems, identifying any constraints including environmental and sustainability limitations; ethical, health, safety, security and risk issues, intellectual property; codes of practice and standards;
  • K7.   the commercial, economic and social context of engineering processes;
  • K8.   the management techniques, including project management, that may be used to achieve engineering objectives, including the planning and managing the design process, including cost drivers, and evaluate outcomes;
  • K9.   awareness of relevant legal requirements governing engineering activities, including personnel, health & safety, contract, intellectual property rights, product safety and liability issues;
  • K10.   the risk issues, including health & safety, environmental and commercial risk, and risk assessment and risk management techniques.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • C1.   appreciate the broad range of influences and activities within the engineering processes and explain their significance;
  • C2.   evaluate technical and commercial risk and make decision based on available information;
  • C3.   address human factors considerations in engineering processes and design;
  • C4.   analyse engineering problems to assist in the management of engineering processes;
  • C5.   identify solutions to engineering problems from a sustainable/environmental standpoint;
  • C6.   contribute to the innovation development of a new product and its introduction to the market.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • P1.   use the design and manufacturing processes to plan and manage engineering  projects;
  • P2.   plan and implement re-organisation of a company for increased effectiveness;
  • P3.   make effective use of graphical and modelling techniques for design development and communication;
  • P4.   adopt strategies for non-quantifiable engineering issues;
  • P5.   select suitable computer based techniques for engineering management problems;
  • P6.   generate new ideas and develop and evaluate a range of solutions;
  • P7.   knowledge of characteristics of particular materials, equipment, processes or products;
  • P8.   knowledge of relevant legal and contractual issues;
  • P9.   understanding of appropriate codes of practice and industry standards;
  • P10.  awareness of quality issues and their application to continuous improvement;
  • P11.  understanding of, and the ability to work in, different roles within an engineering team.

 

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able:

  • T1.   plan and monitor multi-disciplinary projects;
  • T2.   appreciate the central role of management within engineering;
  • T3.   communicate effectively and make presentations of a technical/business nature to achieve maximum impact;
  • T4.   identify methods to assist in innovation, team-working and engineering communication;
  • T5.   demonstrate competence in using computer based engineering techniques;
  • T6.   adopt systematic approach to integrating design requirements, materials and structures;
  • T7.   use time and resources effectively;
  • T8.   exercise initiative and personal responsibility, which may be as a team member or leader.

 

 

 

4. Programme structure

4.1  Part A – Introductory Modules

Code Title Modular Weight Semester C/O
MAA307 Engineering Mathematics 20 1+2 C
WSA102 Engineering Science 1 20 1+2 C
WSA604 Materials & Manufacturing Processes 20 1+2 C
BSA505 Organisational Behaviour 10 1 C
WSA400 Application of CAD for Engineering Designers 10 1 C
WSA501 Integrating Studies 1a 10 1 C
WSA210 Manufacturing Management 10 2 C
WSA504 Integrating Studies 1b 10 2 C
WSA900 Electronics and Electrical Technology 10 2 C

           

4.2  Part B - Degree Modules

Code Title Modular Weight Semester C/O
WSB600 Manufacturing Process and Technology 20 1+2 C
BSB030 Marketing 10 1 C
WSB201 Digital Manufacturing and Discrete Event Simulation 10 1 C
WSB310 Engineering and Management Modelling 10 1 C
WSB505 Manufacturing Design 10 1 C
WSB610 Manufacturing Technology 10 1 C
BSB135 Consumer Behaviour 10 2 C
MAB206 Statistics 10 2 C
WSB301 Software Engineering 10 2 C
WSB203 Manufacturing Planning and Control 10 2 C
WSB204 Management of the Human Resource 10 2 C

 

4.3    Part I – Optional Placement Year

 

Code Title
WSI010 Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (non-credit bearing)
WSI020 Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (non-credit bearing)
WSI035 Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) (non-credit bearing)

 

For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.

 

4.4    Part C - Degree Modules 

Students MUST choose ONE optional module (10 credits).

Code Title Modular Weight Semester C/O
WSC500 Individual Project 40 1+2 C
WSC200 Engineering Management: Finance Law and Quality 10 1 C
WSC201 Organisational Structure & Strategy 10 1 C
WSC602 Sustainable Manufacturing 10 1 C
WSD207 Project Management 10 1 C
WSC206 Product Innovation Management 10 2 C
WSD203 Lean Operations and Supply Chain Management 10 2 C
WSD407 Sustainable Product Design 10 2 C
WSC300 Product Information System - Computer Aided Design 10 2 O
WSC603 Metrology 10 2 O
WSC610 Healthcare Engineering 10 2 O
WSC700 Sports Engineering 10 2 O

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

 4.5    Study Overseas 

Students may choose to study Part C – Semester 1 at an approved Overseas Higher Education Institution.  The mix of subjects of the learning programme must be approved in advance by the Programme Director.  The proposed programme of learning will include work on an Individual Project. 

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to Part C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.

 

 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Part B and Part C, in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX.  The overall average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 40: Part C 60, to determine the degree classification.

Programme Specification

MM BSc/BEng (Hons) Engineering Management (Students undertaking Part C in 2019)

Academic Year: 2019/20

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)

Institution of Mechanical Engineers (IMechE)

Final award BSc / BSc + DPS / BSc + DIS / BSc + DInts / BEng / BEng + DPS / BEng + DIS / BEng + DInts
Programme title Engineering Management
Programme code WSUB04
Length of programme The duration of the programme is 6 semesters, or 8 semesters if students undertake the additional period of study, between Parts B and C, leading to the award of the Diploma of Industrial Studies, Diploma of Professional Studies or the Diploma of International Studies.
UCAS code N290/N291
Admissions criteria

BSc - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/n290

BSc + DPS/DIntS - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/n291

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

This programme is aimed at:

  • A1.   Educating engineering management graduates ready to play a substantial role in industrial  companies through a substantive base of knowledge and understanding at the forefront of the discipline of engineering and manufacturing.
  • A2.   Providing a foundation for graduates wishing to progress to professional engineering management status.
  • A3.   Providing a high quality educational experience for students in a programme of study which combines wide ranging aspects of engineering design and technologies, management models and methodologies, marketing, finance, and business in engineering.
  • A4.   Preparing graduates to apply organisational and project management, team building, and leadership skills in engineering.
  • A5.   Developing analytical and transferable skills that will enable graduates to gain employment in a wide variety of professional roles and to take an ethical approach in making a valuable contribution to society.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015). 

  • Engineering Council (UK). ‘UK-SPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan.2014. 

  • Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014. 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:

  • K1.   engineering principles and the ability to apply them to analyse key engineering processes;
  • K2.   ability to apply quantitative, analytical, modelling and computational methods in order to identify, classify and describe the performance of systems and components and to solve engineering problems and to implement appropriate actions;
  • K3.   requirement for engineering activities to promote sustainable development and ability to apply quantitative techniques where appropriate;
  • K4.   ability to work with information that may be incomplete or uncertain and quantify the effect of this on the design;
  • K5.   ability to evaluate business, customer and user needs, including considerations such as the wider engineering context, public perception and aesthetics;
  • K6.   engineering and business problems, identifying any constraints including environmental and sustainability limitations; ethical, health, safety, security and risk issues, intellectual property; codes of practice and standards;
  • K7.   commercial, economic and social context of engineering processes;
  • K8.   management techniques, including project management, that may be used to achieve engineering objectives, including the planning and managing the design process, including cost drivers, and evaluate outcomes;
  • K9.   relevant legal requirements governing engineering activities, including personnel, health & safety, contract, intellectual property rights, product safety and liability issues;
  • K10.  risk issues, including health & safety, environmental and commercial risk, and risk assessment and risk management techniques.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • C1.   understand the broad range of influences and activities within the engineering processes and explain their significance;
  • C2.   evaluate technical and commercial risk and make decision based on available information;
  • C3.   address human factors considerations in engineering processes and design;
  • C4.   analyse engineering problems to assist in the management of engineering processes;
  • C5.   identify solutions to engineering problems from a sustainable/environmental standpoint;
  • C6.   contribute to the innovation development of a new product and its introduction to the market.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • P1.   use the design and manufacturing processes to plan and manage engineering  projects;
  • P2.   plan and implement re-organisation of a company for increased effectiveness;
  • P3.   make effective use of graphical and modelling techniques for design development and communication;
  • P4.   adopt strategies for non-quantifiable engineering issues;
  • P5.   select suitable computer based techniques for engineering management problems;
  • P6.   generate new ideas and develop and evaluate a range of solutions;
  • P7.   knowledge of characteristics of particular materials, equipment, processes or products;
  • P8.   knowledge of relevant legal and contractual issues;
  • P9.   understanding of appropriate codes of practice and industry standards;
  • P10.  awareness of quality issues and their application to continuous improvement;
  • P11.  understanding of, and the ability to work in, different roles within an engineering team.

 

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able:

  • T1.   plan and monitor multi-disciplinary projects;
  • T2.   appreciate the central role of management within engineering;
  • T3.   communicate effectively and make presentations of a technical/business nature to achieve maximum impact;
  • T4.   identify methods to assist in innovation, team-working and engineering communication;
  • T5.   demonstrate competence in using computer based engineering techniques;
  • T6.   adopt systematic approach to integrating design requirements, materials and structures;
  • T7.   use time and resources effectively;
  • T8.   exercise initiative and personal responsibility, which may be as a team member or leader.

 

 

 

4. Programme structure

4.1  Part A – Introductory Modules

Code Title Modular Weight Semester C/O
MAA307 Engineering Mathematics 20 1+2 C
MMA102 Engineering Science 20 1+2 C
MMA604 Materials & Manufacturing Processes 20 1+2 C
MMA505 Organisational Behaviour 10 1 C
MMA400 Manufacturing Design 1 10 1 C
MMA501 Integrating Studies 1a 10 1 C
MMA210 Manufacturing Management 10 2 C
MMA504 Integrating Studies 1b 10 2 C
MMA900 Electronics and Electrical Technology 10 2 C

  

           

4.2  Part B - Degree Modules

Code Title Modular Weight Semester C/O
WSB600 Manufacturing Process and Technology 20 1+2 C
BSB030 Marketing 10 1 C
BSB580 Operations Management 10 1 C
WSB310 Engineering Management and Modelling 10 1 C
WSB505 Manufacturing Design 10 1 C
WSB610 Manufacturing Technology 10 1 C
BSB135 Consumer Behaviour 10 2 C
MAB206 Statistics 10 2 C
WSB301 Software Engineering 10 2 C
WSB203 Manufacturing Planning and Control 10 2 C
WSB204 Management of the Human Resource 10 2 C

 

4.3    Part I – Optional Placement Year

 

Code Title
WSI010 DIS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing)
WSI020 DPS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing)
WSI035 DIntS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing)

 

For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.

 

 

4.4    Part C - Degree Modules 

Students MUST choose ONE optional module (10 credits).

Code Title Modular Weight Semester C/O
WSC500 Individual Project 40 1+2 C
WSC200 Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality 10 1 C
WSC201 Organisational Structure & Strategy 10 1 C
WSC602 Sustainable Manufacturing 10 1 C
WSD207 Project Management 10 1 C
WSC206 Product Innovation Management 10 2 C
WSD203 Lean Operations and Supply Chain Management 10 2 C
WSD407 Sustainable Product Design 10 2 C
WSC300 Product Information System - Computer Aided Design 10 2 O
WSC603 Metrology 10 2 O
WSC610 Healthcare Engineering 10 2 O
WSC700 Sports Engineering 10 2 O

 

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

 

 4.5    Study Overseas 

Students may choose to study Part C – Semester 1 at an approved Overseas Higher Education Institution.  The mix of subjects of the learning programme must be approved in advance by the Programme Director.  The proposed programme of learning will include work on an Individual Project. 

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to Part C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.

Students may choose to receive the award of BSc or BEng.

 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Part B and Part C, in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX.  The overall average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 40: Part C 60, to determine the degree classification.

Programme Specification

MM BSc/BEng (Hons) Sports Technology (2018 Entry)

Academic Year: 2019/20

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)

Institution of Engineering Designers (IED)

Final award BSc / BSc + DIS / BSc + DPS / BEng / BEng + DIS / BEng + DPS
Programme title Sports Technology
Programme code WSUB05
Length of programme The duration of the programme is 6 semesters, or 8 semesters if students undertake the additional period of study, normally between Parts B and C, leading to the award of the Diploma in Industrial Studies, the Diploma in Professional Studies, or the Diploma of International Studies.
UCAS code CH67/HC76
Admissions criteria

BSc - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/ch67

BSc + DPS/DIntS - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/hc76

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

Sports Technology programme aims to:

 

  • A1.   Develop graduates with a detailed knowledge and understanding of sport-related product design, manufacture and test, human performance and business studies.
  • A2.   Develop graduates with the ability to conduct research and design in sports technology and solve associated problems using both established and contemporary ideas and techniques.
  • A3.   Produce graduates with the analytical and transferable skills that will enable employment in a wide variety of professions and to make a valuable contribution to society.
  • A4.   Support graduates to manage their own learning, communicate effectively and make use of primary source materials.
  • A5.   Provide graduates with an appreciation of the essential practical, commercial and broader societal aspects of engineering.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015). 

  • Engineering Council (UK). ‘UK-SPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan.2014. 

  • Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014. 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:

  • K1.   the underpinning science, mathematics and other disciplines associated with careers related to the design of sports / engineering equipment;
  • K2.   the characteristics of engineering materials, equipment and processes and an awareness of basic mechanical workshop practices;
  • K3.   the role of instrumentation and measurement techniques within equipment evaluation and experimental protocol design;
  • K4.   principles of industrial design, engineering design and manufacturing design;
  • K5.   ergonomic and aesthetic considerations and how they impact on sports design;
  • K6.   the variability in human performance capability and methods of evaluation including fitness and training principles relating to sport and exercise;
  • K7.   principles governing the mechanics and biomechanics of sports movements;
  • K8.   the role of information technology in providing support of product design and manufacturing;
  • K9.   management techniques and business practices and the commercial and economic context of a sports / engineering business;
  • K10.  intellectual property issues and environmental, legal and ethical issues within the modern industrial world.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able:

  • C1.   identify and define a design or sports engineering problem and generate innovative solutions;
  • C2.   analyse, objectively evaluate and apply the principles of industrial design, and engineering design;
  • C3.   utilise the principles of engineering science in the development of solutions to problems;
  • C4.   apply appropriate methods to model such solutions;
  • C5.   apply biomechanics to the analysis of movement in sport;
  • C6.   demonstrate an awareness of form, function, fit, aesthetics, environment and safety;
  • C7.   select and apply appropriate IT tools to product design and manufacture problems;
  • C8.   evaluate commercial risk and market trends within the sports sector
  • C9.   apply general marketing principles to the sports sector.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able:

  • P1.   research information, generate and evaluate product design ideas;
  • P2.   communicate design ideas through the presentation of concept drawings, computer graphics and conventional sketching;
  • P3.   prepare engineering drawings and technical reports;
  • P4.   test design concepts via practical investigation;
  • P5.   use appropriate computer software and laboratory equipment;
  • P6.   use measurement and test equipment to complete experimental laboratory work and collect mechanical and biomechanical data;
  • P7.   use a variety of observation and test methods to appraise human function and movement
  • P8.   present technical and business information in a variety of ways;
  • P9.   manage the design process taking account of customer constraints such as cost, health and safety, risk and environmental issues.

 

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able:

  • T1.   generate and manipulate data;
  • T2.   apply creative, structured and evidence-based approaches to problem solving;
  • T3.   communicate effectively through written, graphical, interpersonal and presentation skills;
  • T4.   organise and manage time and resources to meet deadlines;
  • T5.   work effectively both in a team and independently;
  • T6.   demonstrate organisational and management skills.

4. Programme structure

4.1    Part A - Introductory Modules

 

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
MAA307 Engineering Mathematics 20 1+2 C
WSA401 Product Design (Ergonomics & Visualisation) 20 1+2 C
WSA502 Applied Sports Technology 1 20 1+2 C
WSA400 Application of CAD for Engineering Designers 10 1 C
WSA602 Introduction to Materials and Manufacturing Processes 10 1 C
PSA028 Biomechanics of Sport 10 1 C
WSA700 Measurement Principles 10 2 C
WSA701 Mechanical Design in Sport 10 2 C
WSA900 Electronic and Electrical Technology 1 10 2 C

                

4.2    Part B - Degree Modules 

 

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSB302 Engineering Computation for Sports Technology 20 1+2 C
WSB502 Applied Sports Technology 2 20 1+2 C
WSB503 Application of Product Design in Sports 20 1+2 C
BSB520 Principles of Marketing for Sport and Leisure 10 1 C
WSB700 Sports Goods Design, Manufacturing and Test 10 1 C
WSB701 Measurement and Experimental Design 10 1 C
MAB206 Statistics 10 2 C
PSB002 Structural Kinesiology 10 2 C
PSB028 Methods of Analysis in Sports Biomechanics 10 2 C

 

4.3    Part I – Optional Placement Year 

 

Code Title
WSI010 Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (non-credit bearing)
WSI020 Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (non-credit bearing)

For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) or Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.

 

4.4    Part C - Degree Modules

Students MUST choose 20 credits of optional modules (O) in Semester One, with no more than one module from each group.

Students MUST choose 30 credits of optional modules (O) in Semester Two, with no more than one module from each group. 

 

Code  Title   Weight Semester C/O 
WSC500 Individual Project 40 1+2 C
WSC200 Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality 10 1 C
WSC701 Sports Surfaces, Footwear and Garments 10 1 C
WSC702 Sports Equipment Industry 10 2 C
WSC600 Advanced Manufacturing Processes and Technology 1 10 1 OA
WSC602 Sustainable Manufacturing 10 1 OA
WSC606 Additive Manufacturing for Product Development 10 1 OA
WSC201 Organisation Structure & Strategy 10 1 OB
WSC400 Design for Assembly 10 1 OB
WSC401 Design Methods and Communication 10 1 OC
PSC100 Science and Elite Performance in Sport 20 1+2 OC
PSC028 Advanced Sports Biomechanics 20 1+2 OD
WSC203 Manufacturing Planning & Control 10 2 OE
WSC204 Management of the Human Resource 10 2 OE
WSC300 Product Information Systems - Computer Aided Design 10 2 OF
MPC012 Polymer Engineering - Processes and Manufacture 10 2 OF
WSC610 Healthcare Engineering 10 2 OF

 

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to Part C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX. 

Students may choose to receive the award of BSc or BEng.

 

 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Part B and Part C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX.  The overall average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 40: Part C 60, to determine the degree classification.

Programme Specification

MM BSc/BEng (Hons) Sports Technology (Students undertaking Part C in 2019)

Academic Year: 2019/20

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)

Institution of Engineering Designers (IED)

Final award BSc / BSC + DIS / BSc + DPS / BSc DIntS / BEng / BEng + DIS / BEng + DPS / BEng DIntS
Programme title Sports Technology
Programme code WSUB05
Length of programme The duration of the programme is 6 semesters, or 8 semesters if students undertake the additional period of study, normally between Parts B and C, leading to the award of the Diploma in Industrial Studies, the Diploma in Professional Studies, or the Diploma of International Studies.
UCAS code CH67/HC76
Admissions criteria

BSc - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/ch67

BSc + DPS/DIntS - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/hc76

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The Sports Technology programme aims to:

 

  • A1.   Develop graduates with a detailed knowledge and understanding of sport-related product design, manufacture and test, human performance and business studies.
  • A2.   Develop graduates with the ability to conduct research and design in sports technology and solve associated problems using both established and contemporary ideas and techniques.
  • A3.   Produce graduates with the analytical and transferable skills that will enable employment in a wide variety of professions and to make a valuable contribution to society.
  • A4.   Support graduates to manage their own learning, communicate effectively and make use of primary source materials.
  • A5.   Provide graduates with an appreciation of the essential practical, commercial and broader societal aspects of engineering.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015). 

  • Engineering Council (UK). ‘UK-SPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan.2014. 

  • Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014. 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:

  • K1.   the underpinning science, mathematics and other disciplines associated with careers related to the design of sports / engineering equipment;
  • K2.   characteristics of engineering materials, equipment and processes and an awareness of basic mechanical workshop practices;
  • K3.   the role of instrumentation and measurement techniques within equipment evaluation and experimental protocol design;
  • K4.   principles of industrial design, engineering design and manufacturing design;
  • K5.   ergonomic and aesthetic considerations and how they impact on sports design;
  • K6.   the variability in human performance capability and methods of evaluation including fitness and training principles relating to sport and exercise;
  • K7.   principles governing the mechanics and biomechanics of sports movements;
  • K8.   the role of information technology in providing support of product design and manufacturing;
  • K9.   management techniques and business practices and the commercial and economic context of a sports / engineering business;
  • K10.  intellectual property issues and environmental, legal and ethical issues within the modern industrial world.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able:

  • C1.   identify and define a design or sports engineering problem and generate innovative solutions;
  • C2.   analyse, objectively evaluate and apply the principles of industrial design, and engineering design;
  • C3.   utilise the principles of engineering science in the development of solutions to problems;
  • C4.   apply appropriate methods to model such solutions;
  • C5.   apply biomechanics to the analysis of movement in sport;
  • C6.   demonstrate an awareness of form, function, fit, aesthetics, environment and safety;
  • C7.   select and apply appropriate IT tools to product design and manufacture problems;
  • C8.   evaluate commercial risk and market trends within the sports sector
  • C9.   apply general marketing principles to the sports sector.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able:

  • P1.   research information, generate and evaluate product design ideas;
  • P2.   communicate design ideas through the presentation of concept drawings, computer graphics and conventional sketching;
  • P3.   prepare engineering drawings and technical reports;
  • P4.   test design concepts via practical investigation;
  • P5.   use appropriate computer software and laboratory equipment;
  • P6.   use measurement and test equipment to complete experimental laboratory work and collect mechanical and biomechanical data;
  • P7.   use a variety of observation and test methods to appraise human function and movement
  • P8.   present technical and business information in a variety of ways;
  • P9.   manage the design process taking account of customer constraints such as cost, health and safety, risk and environmental issues.

 

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able:

  • T1.   generate and manipulate data;
  • T2.   apply creative, structured and evidence-based approaches to problem solving;
  • T3.   communicate effectively through written, graphical, interpersonal and presentation skills;
  • T4.   organise and manage time and resources to meet deadlines;
  • T5.   work effectively both in a team and independently;
  • T6.   demonstrate organisational and management skills.

4. Programme structure

4.1    Part A - Introductory Modules

 

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
MAA307 Engineering Mathematics 20 1+2 C
MMA401 Product Design (Ergonomics & Visualisation) 20 1+2 C
MMA502 Applied Sports Technology 1 20 1+2 C
MMA400 Manufacturing Design 1 10 1 C
MMA602 Introduction to Materials and Manufacturing Processes 10 1 C
PSA028 Biomechanics of Sport 10 1 C
MMA700 Measurement Principles 10 2 C
MMA701 Mechanical Design in Sport 10 2 C
MMA900 Electronic and Electrical Technology 1 10 2 C

                

4.2    Part B - Degree Modules 

 

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSB302 Engineering Computation for Sports Technology 20 1+2 C
WSB502 Applied Sports Technology 2 20 1+2 C
WSB503 Application of Product Design for Sports 20 1+2 C
BSB520 Principles of Marketing for Sport & Leisure 10 1 C
WSB700 Sports Goods Design, Manufacturing and Test 10 1 C
WSB701 Measurement and Experimental Design 10 1 C
MAB206 Statistics 10 2 C
PSB002 Structural Kinesiology 10 2 C
PSB028 Methods of Analysis in Sports Biomechanics 10 2 C

 

4.3    Part I – Optional Placement Year 

 

Code Title
WSI010 DIS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing)
WSI015 Industrial Training Placement (DIS, non credit bearing)
WSI020 DPS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing)
WSI035 DIntS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing)

For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.

 

4.4    Part C - Degree Modules

Students MUST choose 20 credits of optional modules (O) in Semester One, with no more than one module from each group.

Students MUST choose 30 credits of optional modules (O) in Semester Two, with no more than one module from each group. 

 

Code  Title   Weight Semester C/O 
WSC500 Individual Project 40 1+2 C
WSC200 Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality 10 1 C
WSC701 Sports Surfaces, Footwear and Garments 10 1 C
WSC702 Sports Equipment Industry 10 2 C
WSC600 Advanced Manufacturing Processes and Technology 1 10 1 OA
WSC602 Sustainable Manufacturing 10 1 OA
WSC606 Additive Manufacturing for Product Development 10 1 OA
WSC201 Organisation Structure & Strategy 10 1 OB
WSC400 Design for Assembly 10 1 OB
WSC401 Design Methods and Communication 10 1 OC
PSC100 Science and Elite Performance in Sport 20 1+2 OC
PSC028 Advanced Sports Biomechanics 20 1+2 OD
WSC203 Manufacturing Planning & Control 10 2 OE
WSC204 Management of the Human Resource 10 2 OE
WSC300 Product Information Systems - Computer Aided Design 10 2 OF
MPC012 Polymer Engineering - Processes and Manufacture 10 2 OF
WSC610 Healthcare Engineering 10 2 OF

 

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to Part C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX. 

Students may choose to receive the award of BSc or BEng.

 

 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Part B and Part C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX.  The overall average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 40: Part C 60, to determine the degree classification.

Programme Specification

EL BEng (Hons) Electronic and Electrical Engineering (2018 and 2019 Entry)

Academic Year: 2019/20

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)

Final award BEng / BEng+DIS / BEng+DPS / BEng+DIntS
Programme title Electronic and Electrical Engineering
Programme code WSUB10
Length of programme The duration of the programme is 6 semesters or 8 semesters if taken with the Diploma in Industrial Studies, Diploma in Professional Studies or Diploma in International Studies. The programme is only available on a full-time basis.
UCAS code H600, H604
Admissions criteria

BEng - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/h600

BEng+DIS /DIntS - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/h604

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The BEng in Electronic and Electrical Engineering aims to: 

  • A1.   Develop highly skilled graduates to pursue careers across the complete spectrum of activities which involve the application of Electronic and Electrical Engineering;
  • A2.   Provide a high-quality learning experience across a complete range of core subjects in order to give students the skills to investigate electronic and electrical engineering problems;
  • A3.   Develop engineers capable of designing systems and managing the development process in order to deliver solutions that meet the requirements of customers;
  • A4.   Produce engineers knowledgeable of engineering management and business practices and of relevant ethical, business, sustainability and legal constraints;
  • A5.   Promote high-quality engineering practice by applying appropriate knowledge, skills, tools and techniques in the analysis, diagnosis and solution of industry-related problems;
  • A6.   Support personal and professional development including problem solving, leadership and team work, both oral and written presentation skills.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: Engineering Technician, Incorporated Engineer and Chartered Engineer Standard, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2013.
  • UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2014.
  • Guidance Note on Academic Accreditation: Engineering Council UK, July 2014.
  • The UK Quality Code for Higher Education: The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, April 2012.
  • Subject Benchmark Statement: Engineering: The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, November 2010.

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to: 

  • K1.   Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of scientific, mathematical and engineering principles appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering;
  • K2.   Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of general engineering principles;
  • K3.   Understand the commercial, economic and sustainable aspects in the application of engineering processes;
  • K4.   Demonstrate awareness of the relevant codes of practice and regulatory frameworks and the operational practices for safe operation of engineering processes;
  • K5.   Show knowledge of the management and business practices appropriate to engineering industries;
  • K6.   Recognise the professional and ethical responsibilities of engineers.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to: 

  • C1.   Apply engineering principles to the analysis of electronic and electrical engineering problems;
  • C2.   Apply mathematical and computer-based methods for modelling and analysing a range of practical and hypothetical engineering processes, components and products;
  • C3.   Investigate and define engineering problems within the framework of economic, social, ethical and environmental issues;
  • C4.   Evaluate and respond to customer needs, including fitness for purpose and cost;
  • C5.   Follow essential design principles appropriate to relevant components, equipment and associated software.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to: 

  • P1.   Apply design, modelling, simulation and analytical methods and tools appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering;
  • P2.   Define and solve practical engineering problems;
  • P3.   Demonstrate an ability to manage the design process;
  • P4.   Use conventional laboratory equipment and relevant test and measurement equipment in an appropriate and safe manner;
  • P5.   Apply relevant codes of practice and industry standards;
  • P6.   Demonstrate awareness of contractual issues and intellectual property rights;
  • P7.   Work with technical uncertainty;
  • P8.   Adopt a suitable systems engineering approach to the solution of electronic and electrical engineering problems;
  • P9.   Use appropriate management tools for project work.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to: 

  • T1.   Search and retrieve information, ideas and data from a variety of sources;
  • T2.   Select and analyse appropriate evidence and data to solve problems;
  • T3.   Apply skills in problem solving, communication, team working and in the use of general software tools;
  • T4.   Develop a personal work plan and take responsibility for its execution, both  independently and as a member of a team;
  • T5.   Produce appropriate technical reports, papers, diagrams and drawings;
  • T6.   Plan self-learning as the foundation for lifelong learning.

4. Programme structure

4.1 Part A 

Code

Title

Weight

Semester

C/O 

WSA015

Industrial Project in Electronic and Electrical Engineering

20

1 + 2

C

WSA011

Electronic Circuits

20

1

C

WSA010

Programming and Software Design

20

1

C

MAA103

Core Mathematics 1

10

1

C

WSA012

Electrical Science A

20

2

C

WSA013

Digital Systems

20

2

C

MAA203

Core Mathematics 2

10

2

C

 

4.2 Part B 

Code

Title

Weight

Semester

C/O 

WSB013

Engineering Project Management

20

1 + 2

C

WSB003

Electrical Science B

20

1

C

WSB010

Electronics

20

1

C

MAB103

Advanced Mathematics 1

10

1

C

WSB002

Communications

20

2

C

WSB004

Control System Design

20

2

C

MAB203

Advanced Mathematics 2

10

2

C

 

4.3 Part I 

Code Title
WSI010 Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (Non-credit bearing)
WSI020 Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (Non-credit bearing)
WSI035 Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) (Non-credit bearing)

For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.

 

4.4 Part C 

Candidates must choose two options ‘o’ from each semester 

Code

Title

Weight

Semester

C/O 

WSC025

Project

30

1 + 2

C

WSC200

Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality

10

1

C

WSC002

Digital Communications Theory and Practice

20

1

O

WSC003

Sustainable & Renewable Energy Systems

20

1

O

WSC018

Embedded Systems Design and Implementation

20

1

O

WSC039

Microwave Communications

20

1

O

WSC041

Digital and State Space Control

20

1

O

WSC004

Computer Networks

20

2

O

WSC014

Bioelectricity and Biophotonics Engineering

20

2

O

WSC022

Power Electronics

20

2

O

WSC054

Electronic Systems Design with FPGAs

20

2

O

WSC055

Digital Interfacing and Instrumentation

20

2

O

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, studnet number resctrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements and other provisions set out in Regulation XX.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

A candidate's final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments at Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 40: Part C 60 to determine the final Programme Mark.

Programme Specification

EL BEng (Hons) Electronic and Electrical Engineering (Students undertaking Part C in 2019)

Academic Year: 2019/20

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)
Institute of Measurement and Control (InstMC)
Energy Institute (EI)

 

Final award BEng/ BEng+DIS
Programme title Electronic and Electrical Engineering
Programme code WSUB10
Length of programme The duration of the programme is 6 semesters or 8 semesters if taken with the Diploma in Industrial Studies. The programme is only available on a full-time basis.
UCAS code H600, H604
Admissions criteria

http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/electronic-electrical-engineering/

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The BEng in Electronic and Electrical Engineering aims to:

  • A1.   provide a programme of study producing graduates that are attractive to the electronic and electrical engineering industry;
  • A2.   ensure a high quality educational experience in which knowledge and skills are developed, to an appropriate level, as preparation for a career in that industry;
  • A3.   provide a broad, well-balanced degree programme in which analytical skills are developed over the full range of core subject areas. Equipping graduates from the programme for employment across all fields appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering;
  • A4.   support students ability to apply their knowledge and skills effectively to solve engineering problems;
  • A5.   develop analytical and transferable skills to enable students to gain employment in a wide variety of professions, thus helping graduates of the programme to make a valuable contribution to society;
  • A6.   maintain an up-to-date curriculum that is responsive to developments both in higher education and in industry, and in a manner which is informed by the School’s research activities;
  • A7.   develop students skills in teamwork, self–learning, planning and communication.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: Engineering Technician, Incorporated Engineer and Chartered Engineer Standard, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2013.

UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2014.

Guidance Note on Academic Accreditation, Engineering Council UK, 2014.

The UK Quality Code for Higher Education.  The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, April 2012.

Subject Benchmark Statement: Engineering, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, November 2010.

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate a knowledge and understanding of:

  • K1.   essential mathematical methods appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering;
  • K2.   essential principles of engineering and/or systems science appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering;
  • K3.   the role of Information Technology and communications;
  • K4.   essential design principles appropriate to relevant components, equipment and associated software;
  • K5.   relevant common engineering materials and components;
  • K6.   management and business practices appropriate to engineering industries;
  • K7.   relevant codes of practice and regulatory frameworks;
  • K8.   basic operational practices and requirements for safe operation relevant to electronic and electrical engineering;
  • K9.   the professional and ethical responsibilities of engineers.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate:

  • C1.   an understanding of standard mathematical and/or computer based methods for modelling and analysing a range of practical and hypothetical engineering problems, and the essential principles of modelling and analysing routine engineering systems, processes, components and products;
  • C2.   a competence in defining and solving practical engineering problems;
  • C3.   the ability to integrate, evaluate and use information, data and ideas from a range of sources in to project work;
  • C4.   the ability to apply systems processes in a range of different engineering contexts.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • P1.   use conventional laboratory equipment and relevant test and measurement equipment in a safe manner;
  • P2.   use computational tools and packages (including programming languages where appropriate) in familiar situations;
  • P3.   design, and where appropriate construct, systems, components or processes;
  • P4.   search for and retrieve information, ideas and data from a variety of sources;
  • P5.   manage a project and produce technical reports, papers, diagrams and drawings.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • T1.   demonstrate skills in problem solving, communication, group working, use of general software and information retrieval, which act as a foundation for life-long learning;
  • T2.   use an engineering and/or systems approach to the solution of problems;
  • T3.   use appropriate management tools including management of time and resources;
  • T4.   select and analyse appropriate evidence/data to solve engineering problems;
  • T5.   work independently or in a team.

4. Programme structure

In the following tables, ‘c’ indicates a compulsory module and ‘o’ indicates an optional module. The optional modules ‘oA’ and ‘oB’ should be considered along with the text following the table in which they appear.  

4.1       Part A - Introductory Modules 

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
ELA004 Signals and Systems 10 1+2 C
ELA007 Introduction to Systems Engineering for Projects 20 1+2 C
MAA303 Mathematics A 20 1+2 C
ELA001 Circuits 20 1+2 C
ELA003 Electronics A 20 1+2 C
ELA010 Introduction to Programming 20 1+2 C
ELA005 Electromagnetism A 10 2 C

The 20 credit module ELA001 Circuits is taught over both semesters, 2/3 of the module is taught in Semester 1 and 1/3 in Semester 2. 

4.2      Part B  - Degree Modules

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSB002 Communications 15 1+2 C
WSB003 Electrical Science B 15 1+2 C
WSB004 Control System Design 15 1+2 C
WSB010 Electronics 20 1+2 C
WSB013 Engineering Project Management 20 1+2 C
MAB303 Mathematics B 20 1+2 C
WSB012 Renewable Energy Systems Analysis 15 1+2 O
WSB014 Software Engineering 15 1+2 O
WSB019 Computer Architecture 15 1+2 O
WSB140 Mechanics 15 1+2 O

Students should take ONE of the optional (o) modules indicated.

4.3   Part C - Degree Modules 

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSC008 Business Management 15 1+2 C
WSC025 Project 30 1+2 C
WSC002 Principles of Digital Communications 15 1+2 O
WSC003 Renewable Energy Sources 15 1+2 O
WSC004 Computer Networks 15 1+2 O
WSC007 Electromagnetism C 15 1+2 O
WSC013 Electromagnetic Compatibility 15 1+2 O
WSC014 Biophotonics Engineering 15 1+2 O
WSC018 Real-Time Software Engineering 15 1+2 O
WSC022 Power Electronics for Renewables 15 1+2 O
WSC030 Bioelectricity - Fundamentals and Applications 15 1+2 O
WSC039 Microwave Communication Systems 15 1+2 O
WSC041 Digital and State Space Control 15 1+2 O
WSC054 Electronic System Design with FPGAs 15 1+2
WSC055 Digital Interfacing and Instrumentation 15 1+2 O
WSC056 Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing 15 1+2 O
DSC502 Human Factors in Systems Design 15 1+2 O
MPC022 Materials Properties and Applications 15 1+2 O

Option modules with a total weight of 75 credits should be chosen.

 

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

 

 4.4   Part I - Industrial Training

For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.

 

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 Criteria for programme progression

In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to Part I or Part C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.

 

5.2  Criteria for progression to an MEng programme

For candidates who commence study on the programme before October, 2016:

Any candidate who has accumulated, at the first attempt, 100 credits, no module mark less than 30% and an overall average mark of at least 55% from modules taken in Part A would normally be allowed to transfer to Part B of any MEng Electronic, Electrical and Systems Engineering programme administered by the Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering should they so wish.

Any candidate who has accumulated, at the first attempt, 100 credits, no module mark less than 30% and an overall average mark of at least 55% from modules taken in Part B would normally be allowed to transfer to the MEng Part C or Part I of their current programme of study should they so wish.  

Such transfers are subject to the prerequisite requirements of the MEng programme.

 

 

 

 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

A candidate's final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments at Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX.  The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 20: Part C 80 to determine the final Programme Mark.

Programme Specification

EL BEng (Hons) Systems Engineering (2018 Entry)

Academic Year: 2019/20

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)

Final award BEng/ BEng+DIS/ BEng+DPS/ BEng+DIntS
Programme title Systems Engineering
Programme code WSUB20
Length of programme The duration of the programme is 6 semesters or 8 semesters if taken with the Diploma in Industrial Studies. The programme is only available on a full-time basis.
UCAS code H652, H650
Admissions criteria

 http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/systems­engineering/

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The BEng in Systems Engineering aims to 

  • A1.   Prepare highly skilled graduates to pursue careers in Systems Engineering across a range of industries and activities involving the design, development, and analysis of complex systems
  • A2.   Provide a high-quality learning experience across a complete range of core subjects in order to give students the skills to investigate systems engineering problems.
  • A3.   Develop engineers capable of designing systems and managing the development process in order to deliver solutions that meet the requirements of customers.
  • A4.   Produce engineers knowledgeable of engineering management and business practices and of the relevant ethical, business, sustainability and legal constraints.
  • A5.   Promote high-quality engineering practice by applying appropriate knowledge, skills, tools and techniques in the analysis, diagnosis and solution of industry-related problems.
  • A6.   Support personal and professional development, including problem solving, leadership and team work and both oral and written presentation skills.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: Engineering Technician, Incorporated Engineer and Chartered Engineer Standard, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2013.
  • UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2014.
  • Guidance Note on Academic Accreditation: Engineering Council UK, July 2014.
  • The UK Quality Code for Higher Education: The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, April 2012.
  • Subject Benchmark Statement: Engineering: The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, November 2010.

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to: 

  • K1.   Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of scientific, mathematical and engineering principles appropriate to systems engineering;
  • K2.   Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of general engineering principles;
  • K3.   Understand the commercial, economic and sustainable aspects in the application of engineering processes;
  • K4.   Demonstrate awareness of the relevant codes of practice and regulatory frameworks and the operational practices for safe operation of engineering processes;
  • K5.   Show knowledge of the management and business practices appropriate to engineering industries;
  • K6.   Recognise the professional and ethical responsibilities of engineers.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to: 

  • C1.   Apply engineering principles to the analysis of electronic and electrical engineering problems;
  • C2.   Apply mathematical and computer-based methods for modelling and analysing a range of practical and hypothetical engineering processes, components and products;
  • C3.   Investigate and define engineering problems within the framework of economic, social, ethical and environmental issues;
  • C4.   Evaluate and respond to customer needs, including fitness for purpose and cost;
  • C5.   Follow essential design principles appropriate to relevant components, equipment and associated software.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to: 

  • P1.   Apply design, modelling, simulation and analytical methods and tools appropriate to systems engineering;
  • P2.   Define and solve practical engineering problems;
  • P3.   Demonstrate an ability to manage the design process;
  • P4.   Use conventional laboratory equipment and relevant test and measurement equipment in an appropriate and safe manner;
  • P5.   Apply relevant codes of practice and industry standards;
  • P6.   Demonstrate awareness of contractual issues and intellectual property rights;
  • P7.   Work with technical uncertainty;
  • P8.   Use appropriate management tools for project work.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to: 

  • T1.   Search and retrieve information, ideas and data from a variety of sources;
  • T2.   Select and analyse appropriate evidence and data to solve problems;
  • T3.   Apply skills in problem solving, communication, team working and in the use of general software tools;
  • T4.   Develop a personal work plan and take responsibility for its execution, both  independently and as a member of a team;
  • T5.   Produce appropriate technical reports, papers, diagrams and drawings;
  • T6.Plan self-learning as the foundation for lifelong learning.

4. Programme structure

4.1 Part A 

Code

Title

Semester

Modular Weight

 C/O

WSA016

Industrial Project in Systems Engineering

1 + 2

20

C

WSA011

Electronic Circuits

1

20

C

WSA010

Introduction to Programming

1

20

C

MAA103

Core Mathematics 1

1

10

C

WSA012

Electrical Science A

2

20

C

WSA013

Digital Systems

2

20

C

MAA203

Core Mathematics 2

2

10

C

  

4.2 Part B 

Candidates must choose one option ‘O’ from semester 1 

Code

Title

Semester

Modular Weight

 C/O

WSB006

Systems Integration

1 + 2

20

C

WSB007

Systems Methods

1

20

C

MAB103

Advanced Mathematics 1

1

10

C

WSB004

Control System Design

2

20

C

WSB009

Mobile Robots

2

20

C

MAB203

Advanced Mathematics 2

2

10

C

WSB010

Electronics

1

20

O

WSB014

Embedded Systems Programming

1

20

O

WSB140

Mechanics for Robots

1

20

O

 

4.3 Part I 

 

Code Title
WSI010 Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (Non-credit bearing)
WSI020 Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (Non-credit bearing)
WSI035 Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) (Non-credit bearing)

 

 

For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.

 

4.4 Part C 

Candidates must choose one option ‘O’ from each semester 

Code

Title

Semester

Modular Weight

C/O 

WSC025

Project

1 + 2

30

C

WSC200

Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality

1

10

C

DSC502

Human Factors in Systems Engineering

1

10

C

WSC012

Systems Engineering Applications

1

10

C

WSC013

Systems Architecture, Simulation and Modelling

2

20

C

WSC018

Embedded Systems Design and Implementation

1

20

O

WSC002

Digital Communications Theory and Practice

1

20

O

WSC003

Sustainable & Renewable Energy Systems

1

20

O

WSC041

Digital and State Space Control

1

20

O

WSC004

Computer Networks

2

20

O

WSC014

Bioelectricity and Biophotonics Engineering

2

20

O

WSC054

Electronic Systems Design with FPGAs

2

20

O

WSC055

Digital Interfacing and Instrumentation

2

20

O

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements and other provisions set out in Regulation XX.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

A candidate's final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments at Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 40: Part C 60 to determine the final Programme Mark.

Programme Specification

EL BEng (Hons) Systems Engineering (Students undertaking Part C in 2019)

Academic Year: 2019/20

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
  • Institution of Engineering and Technology
  • Institute of Measurement and Control
  • Royal Aeronautical Society

 

Final award BEng / BEng + DIS
Programme title Systems Engineering
Programme code WSUB20
Length of programme The duration of the programme is 6 semesters or 8 semesters if taken with the Diploma in Industrial Studies. The programme is only available on a full-time basis.
UCAS code H652, H650
Admissions criteria

BEng - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/h652

BEng + DPS/DIS - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/h650

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The BEng in Systems Engineering aims to:

  • A1.   provide a programme of study producing graduate system engineering practitioners that are capable of gaining employment across a range of military and civilian sectors, working in domains as varied as engineering, manufacturing, transport, energy, commerce, financial, health etc where the development and operation of complex systems and systems of systems is a prime requisite;
  • A2.   ensure a high quality educational experience in which knowledge and skills are developed, to an appropriate level, as a preparation for a career in those sectors;
  • A3.   provide a broad, well-balanced degree programme in which research, analytical and practical skills are developed over the full range of core subject areas thus equipping graduates of the programme for employment as systems engineering practitioners across all fields appropriate to this area of engineering;
  • A4.   provide a range of contexts in which the students can, individually and in groups, apply the knowledge, skills, tools and techniques taught to analyse, diagnose and solve system problems and failures across different types of complex systems and system of systems in a range of domains;
  • A5.   develop transferable skills such as the ability to create concise technical reports, oral and written presentation skills, team-working, IT skills, critical thinking, problem solving and decision making skills etc which will enable graduates of the Programme to gain employment in a wide variety of professions, thus enabling them to make a valuable contribution to society;
  • A6.   Maintain an up-to-date curriculum that is responsive to developments in the delivery of higher education curricula, continues to meet the needs of industry and commerce and which is informed by the School’s on-going research activities;
  • A7.   Create an external interface between the students and their potential employers by the use of external lecturers where appropriate, involvement of industry and commerce in group and individual projects, School forums to channel advice and input on the curriculum content etc.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence; Engineering Technician, Incorporated Engineer and Chartered Engineer Standard, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2013.

UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence; The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2014.

Guidance Note on Academic Accreditation, Engineering Council UK, 2014.

The UK Quality Code for Higher Education.  The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, April 2012.

Subject Benchmark Statement: Engineering, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, November 2010.

 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate a knowledge and understanding of:

  • K1.   the nature of systems and systems thinking and SE concepts and terminology;
  • K2.   the form and value of SE-based techniques, methods and methodologies and their use in the development and evaluation of complex systems and systems of systems (SoS) in a range of engineering/commercial domains;
  • K3.   the provenance and theory behind a range of systems and systems engineering tools, methods and processes;
  • K4.   the need for an integrated systems approach using appropriate and timely configurations of systems engineering methods, tools and processes;
  • K5.   the importance of integrating Requirements Specification, Systems Design and Validation and Verification approaches along the whole systems life cycle;
  • K6.   an overview of the importance of Systems Architecting approaches and models;
  • K7.   essential mathematical methods appropriate to the area of engineering;
  • K8.   essential appropriate principles of engineering and/or systems science;
  • K9.   the role of information technology and communications;
  • K10.   knowledge and information management techniques;
  • K11.   essential design principles appropriate to relevant components, equipment and associated software;
  • K12.   relevant common engineering materials and components;
  • K13.   management and business practices appropriate to engineering industries;
  • K14.   relevant codes of practice and regulatory frameworks;
  • K15.   basic operational practices and requirements for safe operation relevant to electronic and electrical engineering;
  • K16.   the professional and ethical responsibilities of engineers.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate:

  • C1.   an ability to apply a systems engineering approach to engineering, problem structuring and problem solving;
  • C2.   a capability to select and apply different systems engineering tools, methods and processes based on both an understanding of the theory behind the tools and an appreciation of their functionality and applicability to the system context;
  • C3.   an understanding of standard mathematical and/or computer based methods for modelling and analysing a range of practical and hypothetical engineering problems, and the essential principles of modelling and analysing routine engineering systems, processes, components and products;
  • C4.   an understanding of a range of areas dependent on modules studied eg control techniques used in industry, aeronautical considerations of aircraft design and performance, different renewable energy generation technologies, human factors in systems design etc.
  • C5.   a competence in defining and solving practical engineering problems;
  • C6.   the ability to integrate, evaluate and use information, data and ideas from a range of sources in their project work;
  • C7.   the ability to develop and apply system engineering processes in a range of different engineering contexts.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • P1.   develop a viable systems engineering approach to the development of complex systems and systems of systems in a range of engineering and commercial environments;
  • P2.   analyse and identify a problem space, extract and formalize a requirements specification  for a system of interest and select and apply appropriate systems engineering design / validation and verification methods within a defined systems engineering process along the whole system lifecycle;
  • P3.   use conventional laboratory equipment and relevant test and measurement equipment in a safe manner;
  • P4.   use computational tools and packages (including programming and modelling languages where appropriate) in familiar situations;
  • P5.   design, and where appropriate construct, systems, components or processes;
  • P7.   search for, locate, retrieve and reference correctly information, ideas and data from a variety of sources;
  • P8.   manage a project and the inherent technical and project management risks, and produce technical reports, papers, diagrams and drawings.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to: 

  • T1.   Self-management : Readiness to accept responsibility, flexibility, resilience, self-starting, appropriate assertiveness, time management, readiness to improve own performance based on feedback/reflective learning;
  • T2.   Team-working: Respecting others, co-operating, negotiating/persuading, contributing to discussions, interpersonal skills and awareness of interdependence with others;
  • T3.   Leadership: project and group management, delegation v control, verbal and written communication, creativity, problem solving and financial/time/risk management;
  • T4.   Analysis and investigation: use of tools and techniques to gather and analyse information systematically to aid decision-making and critical thinking skills;
  • T5.   Business and customer awareness: Basic understanding of the key drivers for business success – including the importance of innovation and taking calculated risks – and the need to provide customer satisfaction and build customer loyalty;
  • T7.   Problem solving: Analysing facts and situations and applying creative thinking to develop appropriate solutions;
  • T8.   Communication and literacy: Application of literacy, ability to produce clear, structured written work and oral literacy – including listening and questioning;
  • T9.   Positive attitude: A ‘can-do’ approach, self- motivation, a readiness to take part and contribute, openness to new ideas and a drive to make these happen;
  • T10.   Entrepreneurship and enterprise: Broadly, an ability to demonstrate an innovative approach, creativity, collaboration and risk taking. An individual with these attributes can make a huge difference to any business;
  • T11.   IT and networks: programming and application development, databases, modeling software, spreadsheets, word processing, graphics and multi- media;
  • T12.   Risk Management and mitigation.

4. Programme structure

 

 

4.1       Part A - Introductory Modules 

Code

Title

Weight

Semester

C/O

ELA005

Electromagnetism A

10

2

C

ELA004

Signals and Systems

10

1+2

C

ELA007

Introduction to Systems Engineering  for Projects

20

1+2

C

MAA303

Mathematics A

20

1+2

C

ELA001

Circuits

20

1+2

C

ELA003

Electronics A

20

1+2

C

ELA010

Programming and Software Design

20

1+2

C

The 20 credit module ELA001 Circuits is taught over both semesters, 2/3 of the module is taught in Semester 1 and 1/3 in Semester 2.

 

4.2       Part B - Degree Modules

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSB004 Control System Design 15 1+2 C
WSB006 Systems Integration 20 1+2 C
WSB007 Systems Methods 20 1+2 C
WSB008 Aircraft Design 15 1+2 C
MAB303 Mathematics B 20 1+2 C
WSB002 Communications 15 1+2 O
WSB003 Electromechanical Systems 15 1+2 O
WSB140 Mechanics 15 1+2 O

 Students should take two of the optional (o) modules indicated.

 

4.3       Part C - Degree Modules

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSC012 Systems Engineering Applications Theory 15 1+2 C
DSC502 Human Factors in Systems Design C 15 1+2 C
MPC022 Materials Properties and Applications 15 1+2 C
WSC025 Project 30 1+2 C
WSC003 Renewable Energy Sources 15 1+2 OA
WSC007 Electromagnetism C 15 1+2 OA
WSC008 Business Management 15 1+2 OA
WSC013 Electromagnetic Compatibility 15 1+2 OA
WSC014 Biophotonics Engineering 15 1+2 OA
WSC030 Bioelectricity - Fundamentals and Applications 15 1+2 OA
WSC041 Digital State Space Control 15 1+2 OA
WSC056 Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing 15 1+2 OA
XXXXXX Optional Choice from University Catalogue 30 1+2 OB 

 

Optional modules to a total modular weight of 30 may be chosen from those offered by Schools comprising Engineering, Design or Science Departments. Students choosing optional modules from the University Catalogue should also choose at least one option from those listed oA. Modules are restricted to Part C level.

Total modular weight for the year is 120, which should be arranged as near to 60 per semester as possible. Different semester weightings are allowed subject to the approval of the Programme Director.

 

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

 

4.4 Part I - Industrial training

For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 Criteria for Programme Progression

In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to Part I or Part C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.

5.2 Criteria for progression to an MEng programme

For candidates who commence study on the programme before October, 2016:

Any candidate who has accumulated, at the first attempt, 100 credits, no module mark less than 30% and an overall average mark of at least 55% from modules taken in Part A would normally be allowed to transfer to Part B of any MEng Electronic, Electrical and Systems Engineering programmes administered by the Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering should they so wish.

Any candidate who has accumulated, at the first attempt, 100 credits, no module mark less than 30% and an overall average mark of at least 55% from modules taken in Part B would normally be allowed to transfer to the MEng Part C or Part I of their current programme of study should they so wish.

Such transfers are subject to the prerequisite requirements of the MEng programme.

 

 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

A candidate's final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments at Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX.  The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 20: Part C 80 to determine the final Programme Mark.

Programme Specification

EL BEng (Hons) Electronic and Computer Systems Engineering (2018 and 2019 Entry)

Academic Year: 2019/20

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)

Final award BEng / BEng+DIS/ BEng+DPS/ BEng+DIntS
Programme title Electronic and Computer Systems Engineering
Programme code WSUB30
Length of programme The duration of the programme is 6 semesters or 8 semesters if taken with the Diploma in Industrial Studies, Diploma in Professional Studies or Diploma in International Studies. The programme is only available on a full-time basis.
UCAS code H611, H614
Admissions criteria

BEng - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/h611

BEng+DIS /DIntS - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/h614

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The BEng in Electronic and Computer Systems Engineering aims to: 

  • A1.   Cultivate skilled graduates who will shape the future of embedded systems across industries requiring expertise in electronics and software, such as aerospace, automotive, communications, entertainment, gaming and manufacturing.
  • A2.   Provide a high-quality learning experience across a complete range of core subjects in order to give students the skills to investigate electronic and computer systems engineering problems.
  • A3.   Develop engineers capable of designing systems and managing the development process in order to deliver solutions that meet the requirements of customers.
  • A4.   Produce engineers knowledgeable of engineering management and business practices and of the relevant ethical, business, sustainability and legal constraints.
  • A5.   Promote high-quality engineering practice by applying appropriate knowledge, skills, tools and techniques in the analysis, diagnosis and solution of industry-related problems.
  • A6.   Support personal and professional development, including problem solving, leadership and team work and both oral and written presentation skills.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: Engineering Technician, Incorporated Engineer and Chartered Engineer Standard, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2013.
  • UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2014.
  • Guidance Note on Academic Accreditation: Engineering Council UK, July 2014.
  • The UK Quality Code for Higher Education: The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, April 2012.
  • Subject Benchmark Statement: Engineering: The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, November 2010.

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to: 

  • K1.   Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of scientific, mathematical and engineering principles appropriate to electronic and computer systems engineering;
  • K2.   Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of general engineering principles;
  • K3.   Understand the commercial, economic and sustainable aspects in the application of engineering processes;
  • K4.   Demonstrate awareness of the relevant codes of practice and regulatory frameworks and the operational practices for safe operation of engineering processes;
  • K5.   Show knowledge of the management and business practices appropriate to engineering industries;
  • K6.   Recognise the professional and ethical responsibilities of engineers.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to: 

  • C1.   Apply engineering principles to the analysis of electronic and computer systems engineering problems;
  • C2.   Apply mathematical and computer-based methods for modelling and analysing a range of practical and hypothetical engineering processes, components and products;
  • C3.   Investigate and define engineering problems within the framework of economic, social, ethical and environmental issues;
  • C4.   Evaluate and respond to customer needs, including fitness for purpose and cost;
  • C5.   Follow essential design principles appropriate to relevant components, equipment and associated software.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to: 

  • P1.   Apply design, modelling, simulation and analytical methods and tools appropriate to electronic and computer systems engineering;
  • P2.   Define and solve practical engineering problems;
  • P3.   Demonstrate an ability to manage the design process;
  • P4.   Use conventional laboratory equipment and relevant test and measurement equipment in an appropriate and safe manner;
  • P5.   Apply relevant codes of practice and industry standards;
  • P6.   Demonstrate awareness of contractual issues and intellectual property rights;
  • P7.   Work with technical uncertainty;
  • P8.   Adopt a suitable engineering lifecycle approach to the solution of embedded systems problems;
  • P9.   Use appropriate management tools for project work.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to: 

  • T1.   Search and retrieve information, ideas and data from a variety of sources;
  • T2.   Select and analyse appropriate evidence and data to solve problems;
  • T3.   Apply skills in problem solving, communication, team working and in the use of general software tools;
  • T4.   Develop a personal work plan and take responsibility for its execution, both  independently and as a member of a team;
  • T5.   Produce appropriate technical reports, papers, diagrams and drawings;
  • T6.   Plan self-learning as the foundation for lifelong learning.

4. Programme structure

4.1 Part A 

Code

Title

Semester

Modular Weight

C/O 

WSA017

Industrial Project in Electronic and Computer Systems Engineering

1 + 2

20

C

WSA011

Electronic Circuits

1

20

C

WSA010

Programming and Software Design

1

20

C

MAA103

Core Mathematics 1

1

10

C

WSA012

Electrical Science A

2

20

C

WSA013

Digital Systems

2

20

C

MAA203

Core Mathematics 2

2

10

C

  

4.2 Part B 

Candidates must choose one option ‘O’ from semester 2. 

Code

Title

Semester

Modular Weight

C/O 

WSB013

Robotics Project Design and Management

1 + 2

20

C

WSB014

Embedded Systems Programming

1

20

C

WSB010

Electronics

1

20

C

MAB103

Advanced Mathematics 1

1

10

C

MAB203

Advanced Mathematics 2

2

10

C

WSB019

Computer Architecture

2

20

C

WSB002

Communications

2

20

O

WSB004

Control System Design

2

20

O

 

4.4 Part I 

Code Title
WSI010 Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (Non-credit bearing)
WSI020 Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (Non-credit bearing)
WSI035 Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) (Non-credit bearing)

For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DIntS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.

 

4.3 Part C 

Candidates must choose one option ‘O’ from semester 1. 

Code

Title

Semester

Modular Weight

C/O 

WSC025

Project

1 + 2

30

C

WSC200

Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality

1

10

C

WSC018

Embedded Systems Design and Implementation

1

20

C

WSC054

Electronic Systems Design with FPGAs

2

20

C

WSC055

Digital Interfacing and Instrumentation

2

20

C

WSC002

Digital Communications Theory and Practice

1

20

O

WSC003

Sustainable & Renewable Energy Systems

1

20

O

WSC039

Microwave Communications

1

20

O

WSC041

Digital and State Space Control

1

20

O

 

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements and other provisions set out in Regulation XX.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

A candidate's final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments at Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 40: Part C 60 to determine the final Programme Mark.

Programme Specification

EL BEng (Hons) Electronic and Computer Systems Engineering (Students undertaking Part C in 2019)

Academic Year: 2019/20

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)
Institute of Measurement and Control (InstMC)

 

 

Final award BEng / BEng + DIS
Programme title Electronic and Computer Systems Engineering
Programme code WSUB30
Length of programme The duration of the programme is 6 semesters, or 8 semesters if taken with the Diploma in Industrial Studies. The programme is only available on a full-time basis.
UCAS code H611, H614
Admissions criteria

BEng - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/h611

BEng+DIS /DIntS - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/h614

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The BEng in Electronic and Computer Systems Engineering aims to:

  • A1.   provide a programme of study producing graduates that are attractive to the electronic and computer systems engineering industry;
  • A2.   ensure a high quality educational experience in which knowledge and skills are developed, to an appropriate level, as a preparation for a career in that industry;
  • A3.   provide a broad, well-balanced degree programme in which analytical skills are developed over the full range of core subject areas. Equipping graduates of the programme for employment across all fields appropriate to electronic and computer systems engineering;
  • A4.   support each student’s ability to apply their knowledge and skills effectively to solve engineering problems;
  • A5.   develop analytical and transferable skills to enable students to gain employment in a wide variety of professions, thus helping graduates of the programme to make a valuable contribution to society;
  • A6.   maintain up-to-date curriculum that is responsive to developments in both higher education and industry, and which is informed by the School’s research activities;
  • A7.   develop each student’s skills in teamwork, self–learning, planning and communication.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: Engineering Technician, Incorporated Engineer and Chartered Engineer Standard, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2013.

UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2014.

Guidance Note on Academic Accreditation, Engineering Council UK, July 2014.

The UK Quality Code for Higher Education. The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, April 2012.

Subject Benchmark Statement: Engineering, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, November 2010.

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate a knowledge and understanding of:

  • K1.   essential mathematical methods appropriate to the electronic and computer systems engineering industry;
  • K2.   essential principles of engineering appropriate to electronic and computer systems engineering;
  • K3.   the role of Information Technology and communications;
  • K4.   essential design principles appropriate to relevant components, equipment and associated software;
  • K5.   relevant common engineering components;
  • K6.   management and business practices appropriate to engineering industries;
  • K7.   relevant codes of practice and regulatory frameworks;
  • K8.   basic operational practices and requirements for safe operation relevant to electronic and electrical engineering;
  • K9.   the professional and ethical responsibilities of engineers.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate:

  • C1.   an understanding of standard mathematical and computer based methods for modelling and analysing a range of practical and hypothetical engineering problems, and the essential principles of modelling and analysing routine engineering systems, processes, components and products;
  • C2.   a competence in defining and solving practical engineering problems;
  • C3.   the ability to integrate, evaluate and use information, data and ideas from a range of sources into project work;
  • C4.   the ability to apply engineering processes in a range of practical contexts.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • P1.   use conventional laboratory equipment and relevant test and measurement equipment in a safe manner;
  • P2.   use computational tools and packages (including programming languages where appropriate) in familiar situations;
  • P3.   design, and where appropriate construct, systems, components or processes;
  • P4.   search for and retrieve information, ideas and data from a variety of sources;
  • P5.   manage a project and produce technical reports, papers, diagrams and drawings.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • T1.   demonstrate skills in problem solving, communication, group working, use of general software and information retrieval, which act as a foundation for life-long learning;
  • T2.   use an engineering and/or systems approach to the solution of problems;
  • T3.   use appropriate management tools including management of time and resources;
  • T4.   select and analyse appropriate evidence/data to solve engineering problems;
  • T5.   work independently or in a team.

4. Programme structure

 

4.1       Part A - Introductory Modules

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
ELA001 Circuits 20 1+2 C
ELA003 Electronics A 20 1+2 C
ELA004 Signals and Systems 10 1+2 C
ELA007 Introduction to Systems Engineering for Projects 20 1+2 C
ELA010 Programme and Software Design 20 1+2 C
MAA303 Mathematics A 20 1+2 C
ELA005 Electromagnetism A 10 2 C

The 20 credit module ELA001 Circuits is taught over both semesters, 2/3 of the module is taught in Semester 1 and 1/3 in Semester 2.

4.2       Part B - Degree Modules

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSB014 Software Engineering 15 1+2 C
WSB019 Computer Architecture 15 1+2 C
WSB020 Introduction to FPGA 15 1+2 C
WSB010 Electronics B 20 1+2 C
MAB303 Mathematics B 20 1+2 C
WSB006 Systems Integration 20 1+2 OA
WSB013 Engineering Project Management 20 1+2 OA
WSB002 Communications 15 1+2 OB
WSB004 Control System Design 15 1+2 OB

 Students should take one of the optional modules marked oA and one marked oB.

 

4.3       Part C  - Degree Modules

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSC008 Business Management 15 1+2 C
WSC018 Real Time Software Engineering 15 1+2 C
WSC054 Electronic System Design with FPGA's 15 1+2 C
WSC055 Digital Interfacing and Instrumentation 15 1+2 C
WSC025 Project 30 1+2 C
WSC002 Principle of Digital Communications 15 1+2 OB
WSC004 Computer Networks 15 1+2 OB
WSC013 Electromagnetic Compatibility 15 1+2 OB
WSC014 Biophotonics Engineering 15 1+2 OB
WSC030 Bioelectricity - Fundamentals and Applications 15 1+2 OB
WSC039 Microwave Communication Systems 15 1+2 OB
WSC041 Digital and State Space Control 15 1+2 OB
WSC056 Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing 15 1+2 OB
DSC502 Human Factors in Systems Design C 15 1+2 OB
MPC022 Materials Properties and Applications 15 1+2 OB

 

Option modules with a total weight of 30 credits should be chosen.

Options listed as oA will normally continue to be delivered throughout the Semester 1 examination period.  The options listed as oB will normally be suspended during the Semester 1 examination period. Modules marked oA may only be chosen if they were not taken at Part B.

 

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

 

 

4.4  Part I - Industrial training

For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 Criteria for programme progression 

In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to Part I or Part C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.

 

5.2 Criteria for progression to an MEng programme

For candidates who commence study on the programme before October, 2016:

Any candidate who has accumulated, at the first attempt, 100 credits, no module mark less than 30% and an overall average mark of at least 55% from modules taken in Part A would normally be allowed to transfer to Part B of any MEng Electronic, Electrical and Systems Engineering programme administered by the Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering should they so wish.

Any candidate who has accumulated, at the first attempt, 100 credits, no module mark less than 30% and an overall average mark of at least 55% from modules taken in Part B would normally be allowed to transfer to the MEng Part C or Part I of their current programme of study should they so wish.  

Such transfers are subject to the prerequisite requirements of the MEng programme. 

 

 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

A candidate's final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments at Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX.  The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 20: Part C 80 to determine the final Programme Mark.

Programme Specification

EL BEng (Hons) Robotics, Mechatronics and Control Engineering

Academic Year: 2019/20

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)

Final award BEng/BEng + DPS/BEng + DInts/BEng +DIS
Programme title Robotics, Mechatronics and Control Engineering
Programme code WSUB35
Length of programme The duration of the programme is 6 semesters or 8 semesters if taken with the Diploma in Industrial Studies, Diploma of Professional Studies of Diploma of International Studies. The programme is only available on a full-time basis.
UCAS code H671, H672
Admissions criteria

BEng - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/h671

BEng + DPS/DIntS - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/h672

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The BEng in Robotics, Mechatronics and Control Engineering aims to: 

  • A1.   Prepare highly skilled graduates to pursue careers in Robotics, Mechatronics and Control Engineering  across a range of industries and activities involving the design, development, and analysis of complex systems
  • A2.   Provide a high-quality learning experience across a complete range of core subjects in order to give students the skills to investigate robotics, mechatronics and control engineering problems;
  • A3.   Develop engineers capable of designing systems and managing the development process in order to deliver solutions that meet the requirements of customers.
  • A4.   Produce engineers knowledgeable of engineering management and business practices and of the relevant ethical, business, sustainability and legal constraints.
  • A5.   Promote high-quality engineering practice by applying appropriate knowledge, skills, tools and techniques in the analysis, diagnosis and solution of industry-related problems.
  • A6.   Support personal and professional development, including problem solving, leadership and team work and both oral and written presentation skills.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: Engineering Technician, Incorporated Engineer and Chartered Engineer Standard, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2013.
  • UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2014.
  • Guidance Note on Academic Accreditation: Engineering Council UK, July 2014.
  • The UK Quality Code for Higher Education: The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, April 2012.
  • Subject Benchmark Statement: Engineering: The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, November 2010.

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

 On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to: 

  • K1.   Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of scientific, mathematical and engineering principles appropriate to robotics, mechatronics and control engineering;
  • K2.   Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of general engineering principles;
  • K3.   Understand the commercial, economic and sustainable aspects in the application of engineering processes;
  • K4.   Demonstrate awareness of the relevant codes of practice and regulatory frameworks and the operational practices for safe operation of engineering processes;
  • K5.   Show knowledge of the management and business practices appropriate to engineering industries;
  • K6.   Recognise the professional and ethical responsibilities of engineers.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to: 

  • C1.   Apply engineering principles to the analysis of robotics, mechatronic and control engineering problems;
  • C2.   Apply mathematical and computer-based methods for modelling and analysing a range of practical and hypothetical engineering processes, components and products;
  • C3.   Investigate and define engineering problems within the framework of economic, social, ethical and environmental issues;
  • C4.   Evaluate and respond to customer needs, including fitness for purpose and cost;
  • C5.   Follow essential design principles appropriate to relevant components, equipment and associated software.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to: 

  • P1.   Apply design, modelling, simulation and analytical methods and tools appropriate to robotics, mechatronics and control engineering;
  • P2.   Define and solve practical engineering problems;
  • P3.   Demonstrate an ability to manage the design process;
  • P4.   Use conventional laboratory equipment and relevant test and measurement equipment in an appropriate and safe manner;
  • P5.   Apply relevant codes of practice and industry standards;
  • P6.   Demonstrate awareness of contractual issues and intellectual property rights;
  • P7.   Work with technical uncertainty;
  • P8.   Adopt a suitable systems engineering approach to the solution of robotics, mechatronics and control engineering problems;
  • P9.   Use appropriate management tools for project work.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to: 

  • T1.   Search and retrieve information, ideas and data from a variety of sources;
  • T2.   Select and analyse appropriate evidence and data to solve problems;
  • T3.   Apply skills in problem solving, communication, team working and in the use of general software tools;
  • T4.   Develop a personal work plan and take responsibility for its execution, both  independently and as a member of a team;
  • T5.   Produce appropriate technical reports, papers, diagrams and drawings;
  • T6.   Plan self-learning as the foundation for lifelong learning.

4. Programme structure

4.1 Part A 

Code

Title

Semester

Modular Weight

C/O 

WSA018

Industrial Project in Robotics, Mechatronics and Control Engineering

1 + 2

20

C

WSA011

Electronic Circuits

1

20

C

WSA010

Programming and Software Design

1

20

C

MAA103

Core Mathematics 1

1

10

C

WSA012

Electrical Science A

2

20

C

WSA013

Digital Systems

2

20

C

MAA203

Core Mathematics 2

2

10

C

 

4.2 Part B 

Code

Title

Semester

Modular Weight

C/O 

WSB013

Robotics Project Design and Management

1 + 2

20

C

MAB103

Advanced Mathematics 1

1

10

C

WSB010

Electronics

1

20

C

WSB140

Mechanics for Robot

1

20

C

WSB004

Control System Design

2

20

C

WSB009

Mobile Robots

2

20

C

MAB203

Advanced Mathematics 2

2

10

C

 

4.3 Part I 

Code Title
WSI010 Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (Non-credit bearing)
WSI020 Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (Non-credit bearing)
WSI035 Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) (Non-credit bearing)

 

For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.

4.4 Part C 

Candidates must choose one option ‘O’ from semester 2

Code

Title

Semester

Modular Weight

C/O 

WSC025

Project

1 + 2

30

C

WSC200

Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality

1

10

C

WSC041

Digital and State Space Control

1

20

C

MMC108

Manufacturing Automation and Control

1

10

C

WSC012

Systems Engineering Applications

1

10

C

WSC055

Digital Interfacing and Instrumentation

2

20

C

WSC004

Computer Networks

2

20

O

WSC014

Bioelectricity and Biophotonics Engineering

2

20

O

WSC022

Power Electronics

2

20

O

WSC054

Electronic Systems Design with FPGAs

2

20

O

 

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements and other provisions set out in Regulation XX.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

A candidate's final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments at Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 40: Part C 60 to determine the final Programme Mark.

Programme Specification

MM MEng (Hons) Manufacturing Engineering (Students undertaking Part C in 2019)

Academic Year: 2019/20

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)

Institution of Mechanical Engineers (IMechE)

Final award MEng / MEng+DIS / MEng+DPS / MEng+DInts
Programme title Manufacturing Engineering
Programme code WSUM01
Length of programme The duration of the programme is eight semesters, or ten semesters if students undertake the additional period of study normally between Parts B and C for the award of the Diploma of Industrial Studies, the Diploma of International Studies or the Diploma of Professional Studies.
UCAS code H701, H707
Admissions criteria

MEng - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/h701

 

MEng+DPS/DIntS - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/h707

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The overall aim of this programme is to equip students with the knowledge, understanding, key skills and attributes to make a substantial impact in manufacturing enterprises. To achieve this, the course provides the core engineering science background, supported by a broad knowledge of manufacturing processes and technology. This is combined with modules covering the management of manufacturing activities that, all together, allows students to understand, monitor and enhance existing processes, and develop new manufacturing methods. The depth offered by this MEng programme will enable students to progress rapidly both technically and managerially in a range of manufacturing organisations. 

Specific aims are: 

•      A1.   To deliver technical depth in core engineering subjects and specialist applications leading to a broad understanding of engineering knowledge, and a critical awareness of current insights in the fields of manufacturing engineering and manufacturing management. 

•      A2.   To produce high quality MEng graduates with a strong academic background and excellent communication skills able to manage their own learning and solve complex problems individually and in teams. 

•      A3.   To equip manufacturing engineering graduates with a broad appreciation of the essential practical, commercial and social aspects of engineering enabling them to progress rapidly to a position of responsibility, and to become future technical and managerial leaders.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015). 
  • Engineering Council (UK). ‘UK­SPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan.2014. 
  • Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014. 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:

  • K1.   the underpinning science, mathematics and other disciplines associated with a career in manufacturing engineering;
  • K2.   engineering principles and relevant numerical methods and an understanding of the role of information technology in providing support for manufacturing engineers;
  • K3.   codes of practice, industry standards and quality issues applicable to a career in manufacturing;
  • K4.   the management of manufacturing methods and the wider business background appropriate to the organisation of a manufacturing enterprise;
  • K5.   the commercial and economic context, together with the importance of sustainability, legal, ethical and intellectual property issues within the modern industrial world;
  • K6.   material properties, manufacturing processes and technologies, their limitations and applicability, with an awareness of new developments in these areas;
  • K7.   the design process related to the manufacturing arena.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

The MEng graduate will also be able to use such knowledge and understanding in a creative way and be able to:  

  • C1.   define an unfamiliar manufacturing related problem, evaluate its technical and business requirements and generate innovative solutions that consider the system as a whole including constraints such as economics, production capabilities and sustainability;
  • C2.   apply appropriate methods (including analytical and computational methods) to model and critically assess such solutions making allowance for uncertainty in the information available;
  • C3.   investigate methods to continuously improve manufacturing processes for enhanced quality, sustainability and economics;
  • C4.   research data and fundamental knowledge from other disciplines and apply the relevant aspects in the solution of unfamiliar problems;
  • C5.   understand the role of other engineering disciplines and their technical and business constraints. 
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • P1.   use appropriate computer software numerical modelling methods and/or computational techniques to solve engineering problems;
  • P2.   use laboratory and mechanical workshop equipment competently and safely;
  • P3.   research information from a wide range of sources;
  • P4.   prepare engineering drawings and other technical data and present it in alternative forms to create good understanding and/or impact;
  • P5.   manage the manufacturing related design process taking account of customer constraints such as cost, health and safety and risk.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • T1.   critically evaluate an existing or proposed technology;
  • T2.   use a range of computer based systems and adapt them to other applications;
  • T3.   communicate effectively through written, graphical, interpersonal and presentation skills;
  • T4.   develop, monitor and update a personal programme of work for themselves and/or others, to reflect changing requirements and learn independently;
  • T5.   gather information from a range of sources, collate it and present its key findings;
  • T6.   undertake different roles within a team that may include leadership. 

4. Programme structure

4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules

 

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
MAA306

Mathematics for Manufacturing Engineering

20 1+2 C
WSA102 Engineering Science 1 20 1+2 C
WSA604 Materials and Manufacturing Processes 20 1+2 C
WSA400 Application of CAD for Engineering Designers 10 1 C
WSA501 Integrating Studies 1a 10 1 C
WSA610 Manufacturing Technology 10 1 C
WSA210 Manufacturing Management 10 2 C
WSA504 Integrating Studies 1b 10 2 C
WSA900 Electronics and Electrical Technology 1 10 2 C

 

4.2    Part B ­ Degree Modules

 

 Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSB501 Integrating Studies 20 1+2 C
WSB600 Manufacturing Process Technology 20 1+2 C
WSB112 Engineering Science 2 10 1 C
WSB200 Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality 10 1 C
WSB310 Engineering and Management Modelling 10 1 C
WSB505 Manufacturing Design 10 1 C
MAB206 Statistics 10 2 C
WSB203 Manufacturing Planning and Control 10 2 C
WSB301 Software Engineering 10 2 C
WSB413 Machine Design 10 2 C

  

4.3 Part I - Optional Placement Year

  

Code Title
WSI010 Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (non-credit bearing)
WSI020 Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (non-credit bearing)
WSI035

Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) (non-credit bearing)

For candidates who are reigstered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DIntS), Part I will be between Parts B and C or Parts C and D and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.

 

4.4    Part C ­ Degree Modules 

Some modules in Part C and D are paired together. For example, (1a) in part C is paired with (2a) in part D. All students MUST COMPLETE AT LEAST TWO of these specialist module pairs during part C or D.  The second module of a pair (numbered 2) may not be taken without the prerequisite module (numbered 1) but the preliminary modules may be studied independently. 

Students MUST choose 10 credits from Semester One and 10 credits from Semester Two.

 

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSD550 Individual Project 50 1+2 C
WSC600 Advanced Manufacturing Processes and Technology 1 10 1 C (1d)
WSC602 Sustainable Manufacturing 10 1 C (1c)
WSC606 Additive Manufacturing for Product Development 10 1 C (1e)
WSC206 Product Innovation Management 10 2 C
WSC603 Metrology 10 2 C
WSC205 International Project Management 10 1 O
WSC900 Computer Control and Instrumentation 10 1 O
LAN*** University Wide Language 10 1 O
WSC106 Finite Element Analysis 10 2 O (1a)
WSC300 Product Information Systems - Computer Aided Design 10 2 O
MPC012 Polymer Engineering - Processing and Manufacturing 10 2 O (1b)

 

 

 All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

 

4.5    Part D ­ Degree Modules 

A number of modules are paired together.  For example, the module marked (1a) in part C is paired with (2a) in part D. All students MUST COMPLETE AT LEAST TWO of these specialist module pairs during part C or D.  The second module of a pair (numbered 2) may not be taken without the prerequisite module (numbered 1) but the preliminary modules may be studied independently. 

Students MUST choose 20 credits from Semester One, with no more than 10 credits from each of the Groups A, B, C or D and 30 credits from Semester Two

When making selections, students must ensure that they choose at least 20 credits of optioanl D level modules.

Students may not select both WSC700 Sports Technology and WSC610 Healthcare Engineering.

Students cannot choose modules already studied in Part C.

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSD503 Project Engineering - Total Product Design 30 1+2 C
WSD207 Project Management 10 1 C
WSC400 Design for Assembly 10 1 C
WSC401 Design Methods and Communication 10 1 C
WSD203 Lean Operations and Supply Chain Management 10 2 C
WSC201 Organisation Structure and Strategy 10 1 OA
MPD014 Polymer Engineering - Properties and Design 10 1 OB (2b)
WSD100 Structural Integrity 10 1 OB (2a)
WSC108 Manufacturing Automation and Control 10 1 OC
WSC900 Computer Control and Instrumentation 10 1 OC
LAN*** University Wide Language 10 1 OD
WSC204 Management of the Human Resource 10 2 O
WSC610 Healthcare Engineering 10 2 O
WSC700 Sports Technology 10 2 O
WSC911 Industrial Machine Vision 10 2 O
WSD407 Sustainable Product Design 10 2 O (2c)
WSD601 Advanced Manufacturing Processes and Technology 2 10 2 O (2d)
WSD606 Additive Manufacturing and Reverse Engineering 10 2 O (2e)

 

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

4.6 Studies Overseas

Students may choose to study Semester 1 only, during their Part D at an approved Overseas Higher Education Institution. The mix of subjects of the learning programme must first be approved by the Programmed Director. An acceptable learning programme must include a major group project and studies at an advanced/masters level with modular weight not less than 20.

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 Criteria for Progression and Award of Degree 

 

Progression from Part A to Part B, from Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D will be subject to the provisions set out in Regulation XX and in addition candidates must accumulate 120 credits and achieve an overall average of 55% in each part. 

To qualify for the Degree of Masters of Engineering, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part D, with no module mark below 30%.

 

 5.2 Criteria for Candidates who do not meet the requirements for Progression or the Award of a Degree 

Any candidate who fails to achieve the criteria for progression from Part A to Part B, Part B to Part C or Part C to Part D shall have the opportunity to repeat module assessments in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XX. Alternatively, the candidate may elect to enter the BEng Honours Degree programme in Manufacturing Engineering, provided that the candidate has satisfied the criteria for progression on the BEng programme at the appropriate point. 

Any candidate who, having successfully completed Part C, is unable to commence or complete Part D or who fails to achieve the criteria necessary for the award of MEng may, at the discretion of the Programme Board, be awarded the degree of BEng in Manufacturing Engineering with a classification corresponding to the candidate’s achievements in the Part B and Part C assessments and determined on the basis of the weightings given for the BEng programme.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX.  The overall average percentage marks for each part will be combined in the ratio (Part B 20: Part C 40: Part D 40) to determine the overall average percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark)    

Programme Specification

MM MEng (Hons) Product Design Engineering (2018 Entry)

Academic Year: 2019/20

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Institution of Engineering Designers (IED)

Institution of Mechanical Engineers (IMechE)

Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)

Final award MEng/ MEng+DIS/ MEng+DPS/MEng+DInts
Programme title Product Design Engineering
Programme code WSUM02
Length of programme The duration of the programme is 8 semesters, or 10 semesters if students undertake the additional period of study, normally between Parts B and C, leading to the award of the Diploma in Industrial Studies, the Diploma of International Studies, or the Diploma of Professional Studies.
UCAS code HHC7, HHD7
Admissions criteria

http://www.lboro.ac.uk/departments/meme/undergraduate/courses/

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

This programme aims to bridge the disciplines of mechanical engineering, manufacturing engineering and product design.  To provide design content which is applicable to products, processes and systems. 

  • A1.   To deliver in-depth knowledge and understanding of key aspects of engineering science, manufacturing engineering, innovation and appropriate management techniques.
  • A2.   To provide opportunities for students to develop appropriate design and project engineering skills, including dealing with open-ended problems and elements of uncertainty and risk.
  • A3.   To develop the ability to solve a broad range of engineering problems, some complex and novel, using contemporary ideas and techniques.
  • A4.   To enable students to manage their own learning, communicate effectively and make use of primary source materials.
  • A5.   To put human and project management theory into practice through team-working and opportunities for leadership experience.
  • A6.   To provide insight into engineering practice and commercial aspects of engineering and design.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015). 

  • Engineering Council (UK). ‘UK-SPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan.2014. 

  • Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014. 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:

  • K1.   the underpinning science, mathematics and other disciplines associated with careers related to product design engineering;
  • K2.   engineering principles, quantitative methods, mathematical and computer models;
  • K3.   the design processes and methodologies and the ability to manage a design project;
  • K4.   codes of practice, industry standards and quality issues, including new developments and limitations, as applicable to a product design engineering career;
  • K5.   intellectual property issues and of environmental, legal and ethical issues within the modern industrial world;
  • K6.   developing technologies in two areas of specialisation and an understanding of the broad range of concepts necessary for effective product design and manufacture;
  • K7.   management and business practices appropriate for a career in product design engineering and an understanding of the commercial and economic context and drivers of the engineering business;
  • K8.   the characteristics of engineering materials, equipment and processes and mechanical workshop practices.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

The MEng graduate will be able to use such knowledge and understanding in a creative way and be able to:

  • C1.   identify and define a design engineering problem in unfamiliar situations and generate innovative solutions:
  • C2.   apply and adapt appropriate methods to model such solutions and assess the limitations of each method;
  • C3.   analyse engineering solutions using contemporary computer-based systems and appreciate their limitations;
  • C4.   investigate new and emerging technologies using fundamental knowledge;
  • C5.   analyse, objectively evaluate and apply the principles of industrial design, engineering design and manufacturing design to product design and development;
  • C6.   extract, from given data, that which is pertinent to an unfamiliar problem and make use of it in finding a solution;
  • C7.   select appropriate data from a range of possible data sets and present them in alternative forms to create deeper understanding and/or greater impact;
  • C8.   integrate knowledge from all aspects of the programme, applying understanding to novel and challenging situations, while being aware of the limitations of solutions;
  • C9.   generate an innovative design for systems, components or processes to fulfil new needs.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • P1.   manage and lead the design process taking account of customer constraints such as cost, health and safety, risk and environmental issues;
  • P2.   apply engineering techniques taking account of a range of commercial and industrial constraints;
  • P3.   communicate product design ideas through the presentation of concept drawings, computer visualisations and conventional sketching;
  • P4.   prepare engineering drawings, computer visualisations and technical reports and give technically competent oral presentations;
  • P5.   research information and use new methods required for novel situations;
  • P6.   use appropriate computer software and laboratory equipment;
  • P7.   recognise the capabilities and limitations of computer based methods for engineering problem solving.
  • P8.   demonstrate advanced organisational and management skills.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • T1.   demonstrate a high level of numeracy;
  • T2.   apply creative and structured approaches to problem solving;
  • T3.   communicate effectively through written, graphical, interpersonal and presentation skills;
  • T4.   design and implement computer-based information systems;
  • T5.   work independently;
  • T6.   work in and lead a team;
  • T7.   organise and manage time and resources effectively;
  • T8.   learn new theories, concepts, methods etc. in an unfamiliar situation outside the discipline area.

4. Programme structure

4.1    Part A - Introductory Modules

 

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
MAA306 Mathematics for Manufacturing Engineering 20 1+2 C
WSA102 Engineering Science 1 20 1+2 C
WSA401 Product Design (Ergonomics & Visualisation) 20 1+2 C
WSA604 Materials and Manufacturing Processes 20 1+2 C
WSA400 Application of CAD for Engineering Designers 10 1 C
WSA501 Integrating Studies 1a 10 1 C
WSA504 Integrating Studies 1b 10 2 C
WSA900 Electronic and Electrical Technology 1 10 2 C

                

4.2    Part B - Degree Modules 

 

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSB501 Integrating Studies 20 1+2 C
WSB504 Application of Product Design 20 1+2 C
WSB112 Engineering Science 2 10 1 C
WSB310 Engineering and Management Modelling 10 1 C
WSB400 Industrial Design 10 1 C
WSB610 Manufacturing Technology 10 1 C
WSB210 Manufacturing Management 10 2 C
WSB301 Software Engineering 10 2 C
WSB413 Machine Design 10 2 C
MAB206 Statistics 10 2 C

 

4.3    Part I – Optional Placement Year 

 

Code Title
WSI010 Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (non-credit bearing)
WSI020 Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (non-credit bearing)
WSI035 Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) (non-credit bearing)

 

For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be between Parts B and C or Parts C and D and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.

 

4.4    Part C - Degree Modules

Students must choose 30 credits of Options (O).  Students MUST select 10 credits from Group A (OA) and no more than 10 credits from each group.

Modules indicated with ** are paired together.  For example, (1a) in part C is paired with (2a) in part D.  Similarly (1e) in Part D is paired with (2e) also in part D.  All students MUST COMPLETE AT LEAST TWO of these specialist module pairs during Part C or D.  The second module of a pair (numbered 2) may not be taken without the prerequisite module (numbered 1) but the preliminary modules may be studied independently. 

Code  Title   Weight Semester C/O 
WSC551 Individual Project 50 1+2 C
WSC200 Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality 10 1 C
WSC401 Design Methods and Communication 10 1 C
WSC602 Sustainable Manufacturing 10 1 C
WSC606 Additive Manufacturing for Product Development 10 1 C (1d)
MPC012 Polymer Engineering 1 - Processing and Manufacturing 10 2 OA (1b)
WSC106 Finite Element Analysis 10 2 OA (1c)
WSC300 Product Information Systems - Computer Aided Design 10 2 OB
WSC203 Manufacturing Planning & Control 10 2 OC
WSC610 Healthcare Engineering 10 2 OD
WSC700 Sports Engineering 10 2 OD

 

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

 

   

 

4.5    Part D - Degree Modules           

At least 70 weight of level 7 (D modules) must be taken in Part D.

Students must choose 70 credits of options (O).  Students MUST select 10 credits from group A and 20 credits from group H.  The remaining 40 credits should be no more than 10 credits from each group (B-G, I-L).   Note there will be at least 20 weight of linked modules (follow on from pre-requisite modules in Part C) across both semesters.

Students who elect to study WSC900 (1e) must also study WSD900 (2e) in Part D.

Students can only choose WSD900 once (either from group F or Group H).

Students cannot choose modules already studied in Part C.

 

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSD503 Project Engineering - Total Product Design 30 1+2 C
WSD207 Project Management 10 1 C
WSD407 Sustainable Product Design 10 2 C
MPD014 Polymer Engineering - Properties & Design 10 1 OA (2b)
WSD100 Structural Integrity 10 1 OA (2c)
WSC600 Advanced Manufacturing Processes and Technology 1 10 1 OB (1a)
WSC900 Computer Control and Instrumentation 10 1 OB (1e)
WSC201 Organisation Structure and Strategy 10 1 OC
WSC400 Design for Assembly 10 1 OD
WSD900 Mechatronics 20 1+2 OF (2e)
LAN*** University Wide Language 10 1 OG
WSD601 Advanced Manufacturing Processes and Technology 2 10 2 OH (2a)
WSD606 Additive Manufacturing and Reverse Engineering 10 2 OH (2d)
WSD900 Mechatronics 20 1+2 OH (2e)
WSC206 Product Innovation Management 10 2 OI
WSC603 Metrology 10 2 OJ
WSC610 Healthcare Engineering 10 2 OK
WSC700 Sports Engineering 10 2 OK
LAN*** University Wide Language 10 2 OL
WSC911 Industrial Machine Vision 10 2 OM

 

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

 

 

4.6    Studies Overseas

Students may choose to study Semester 1 only, during their Part D at an approved Overseas Higher Education Institution.  The mix of subjects of the learning programme must first be approved by the Programme Director.  An acceptable learning programme must include a major group project and studies at an advanced/masters level with modular weight not less than 20.  

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 Criteria for Progression and Award of Degree

Progression from Part A to Part B, from Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D will be subject to the provisions set out in Regulation XX and in addition candidates must accumulate 120 credits and achieve an overall average of 55% in each part.

To qualify for the Degree of Masters of Engineering, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part D, and no module mark below 30%.

 

5.2 Criteria for Candidates who do not meet the requirements for Progression or the Award of a Degree

Any candidate who fails to achieve the criteria for progression from Part A to Part B, Part B to Part C or Part C to Part D shall have the opportunity to repeat module assessments in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XX.  Alternatively, the candidate may elect to enter the BEng Honours Degree programme in Product Design Engineering, provided that the candidate has satisfied the criteria for progression on the BEng programme at the appropriate point.

Any candidate who, having successfully completed Part C, is unable to commence or complete Part D or who fails to achieve the criteria necessary for the award of MEng may, at the discretion of the Programme Board, be awarded the degree of BEng in Product Design Engineering with a classification corresponding to the candidate’s achievements in the Part B and Part C assessments and determined on the basis of the weightings given for the BEng programme.  

 

 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Candidate’s final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX.  The overall average percentage marks for each part will be combined in the ratio (Part B 20: Part C 40: Part D 40) to determine the overall average percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).

Programme Specification

MM MEng (Hons) Product Design Engineering (Students undertaking Part C in 2019)

Academic Year: 2019/20

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Institution of Engineering Designers (IED)

Institution of Mechanical Engineers (IMechE)

Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)

Final award MEng/ MEng+DIS/ MEng+DPS/MEng+DInts
Programme title Product Design Engineering
Programme code WSUM02
Length of programme The duration of the programme is 8 semesters, or 10 semesters if students undertake the additional period of study, normally between Parts B and C, leading to the award of the Diploma in Industrial Studies, the Diploma of International Studies, or the Diploma of Professional Studies.
UCAS code HHC7, HHD7
Admissions criteria

http://www.lboro.ac.uk/departments/meme/undergraduate/courses/

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

This programme aims to bridge the disciplines of mechanical engineering, manufacturing engineering and product design.  To provide design content which is  applicable to products, processes and systems.

  • A1.   To deliver in-depth knowledge and understanding of key aspects of engineering science, manufacturing engineering, innovation and appropriate management techniques.
  • A2.   To provide opportunities for students to develop appropriate design and project engineering skills, including dealing with open-ended problems and elements of uncertainty and risk.
  • A3.   To develop the ability to solve a broad range of engineering problems, some complex and novel, using contemporary ideas and techniques.
  • A4.   To enable students to manage their own learning, communicate effectively and make use of primary source materials.
  • A5.   To put human and project management theory into practice through team-working and opportunities for leadership experience.
  • A6.   To provide insight into engineering practice and commercial aspects of engineering and design.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015). 

  • Engineering Council (UK). ‘UK-SPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan.2014. 

  • Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014. 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:

  • K1.   the underpinning science, mathematics and other disciplines associated with careers related to product design engineering;
  • K2.   engineering principles, quantitative methods, mathematical and computer models;
  • K3.   the design processes and methodologies and the ability to manage a design project;
  • K4.   codes of practice, industry standards and quality issues, including new developments and limitations, as applicable to a product design engineering career;
  • K5.   intellectual property issues and of environmental, legal and ethical issues within the modern industrial world;
  • K6.   developing technologies in two areas of specialisation and an understanding of the broad range of concepts necessary for effective product design and manufacture;
  • K7.   management and business practices appropriate for a career in product design engineering and an understanding of the commercial and economic context and drivers of the engineering business;
  • K8.   the characteristics of engineering materials, equipment and processes and mechanical workshop practices.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

The MEng graduate will be able to use such knowledge and understanding in a creative way and be able to:

  • C1.   identify and define a design engineering problem in unfamiliar situations and generate innovative solutions:
  • C2.   apply and adapt appropriate methods to model such solutions and assess the limitations of each method;
  • C3.   analyse engineering solutions using contemporary computer-based systems and appreciate their limitations;
  • C4.   investigate new and emerging technologies using fundamental knowledge;
  • C5.   analyse, objectively evaluate and apply the principles of industrial design, engineering design and manufacturing design to product design and development;
  • C6.   extract, from given data, that which is pertinent to an unfamiliar problem and make use of it in finding a solution;
  • C7.   select appropriate data from a range of possible data sets and present them in alternative forms to create deeper understanding and/or greater impact;
  • C8.   integrate knowledge from all aspects of the programme, applying understanding to novel and challenging situations, while being aware of the limitations of solutions;
  • C9.   generate an innovative design for systems, components or processes to fulfil new needs.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • P1.   manage and lead the design process taking account of customer constraints such as cost, health and safety, risk and environmental issues;
  • P2.   apply engineering techniques taking account of a range of commercial and industrial constraints;
  • P3.   communicate product design ideas through the presentation of concept drawings, computer visualisations and conventional sketching;
  • P4.   prepare engineering drawings, computer visualisations and technical reports and give technically competent oral presentations;
  • P5.   research information and use new methods required for novel situations;
  • P6.   use appropriate computer software and laboratory equipment;
  • P7.   recognise the capabilities and limitations of computer based methods for engineering problem solving.
  • P8.   demonstrate advanced organisational and management skills.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • T1.   demonstrate a high level of numeracy;
  • T2.   apply creative and structured approaches to problem solving;
  • T3.   communicate effectively through written, graphical, interpersonal and presentation skills;
  • T4.   design and implement computer-based information systems;
  • T5.   work independently;
  • T6.   work in and lead a team;
  • T7.   organise and manage time and resources effectively;
  • T8.   learn new theories, concepts, methods etc.  in an unfamiliar situation outside the discipline area.

4. Programme structure

4.1    Part A - Introductory Modules

 

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
MAA306 Mathematics for Manufacturing Engineering 20 1+2 C
MMA102 Engineering Science 1 20 1+2 C
MMA401 Product Design (Ergonomics & Visualisation) 20 1+2 C
MMA604 Materials and Manufacturing Processes 20 1+2 C
MMA400 Manufacturing Design 1 10 1 C
MMA501 Integrating Studies 1a 10 1 C
MMA504 Integrating Studies 1b 10 2 C
MMA900 Electronic and Electrical Technology 1 10 2 C

                

4.2    Part B - Degree Modules 

 

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSB501 Integrating Studies 20 1+2 C
WSB504 Application of Product Design 20 1+2 C
WSB112 Engineering Science 2 10 1 C
WSB310 Engineering and Management Modelling 10 1 C
WSB400 Industrial Design 10 1 C
WSB610 Manufacturing Technology 10 1 C
WSB210 Manufacturing Management 10 2 C
WSB301 Software Engineering 10 2 C
WSB413 Machine Design 10 2 C

 

4.3    Part I – Optional Placement Year 

 

Code Title
WSI010 Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (non-credit bearing)
WSI020 Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (non-credit bearing)
WSI035 Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) (non-credit bearing)

For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be followed between Parts B or C and Parts C and D and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.

 

4.4    Part C - Degree Modules

Students must choose 30 credits of Options (O).  Students MUST select 10 credits from Group A (OA) and no more than 10 credits from each group.

Modules indicated with ** are paired together.  For example, (1a) in part C is paired with (2a) in part D.  Similarly (1e) in Part D is paired with (2e) also in part D.  All students MUST COMPLETE AT LEAST TWO of these specialist module pairs during Part C or D.  The second module of a pair (numbered 2) may not be taken without the prerequisite module (numbered 1) but the preliminary modules may be studied independently. 

Code  Title   Weight Semester C/O 
WSC551 Individual Project 50 1+2 C
WSC200 Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality 10 1 C
WSC401 Design Methods and Communication 10 1 C
WSC602 Sustainable Manufacturing 10 1 C
WSC606 Additive Manufacturing for Product Development 10 1 C (1d)
MPC012 Polymer Engineering 1 - Processing and Manufacture 10 2 OA (1b)
WSC106 Finite Element Analysis 10 2 OA (1c)
WSC300 Product Information Systems - Computer Aided Design 10 2 OB
WSC203 Manufacturing Planning & Control 10 2 OC
WSC610 Healthcare Engineering 10 2 OD
WSC700 Sports Engineering 10 2 OD

 

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

  

4.5    Part D - Degree Modules           

At least 70 weight of level 7 (D modules) must be taken in Part D.

Students must choose 70 credits of options (O).  Students MUST select 10 credits from group A and 20 credits from group H.  The remaining 40 credits should be no more than 10 credits from each group (B-G, I-M).   Note there will be at least 20 weight of linked modules (follow on from pre-requisite modules in Part C) across both semesters.

Students who elect to study WSC900 (1e) must also study WSD900 (2e) in Part D.

Students cannot choose modules already studied in Part C.

 

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSD503 Project Engineering - Total Product Design 30 1+2 C
WSD207 Project Management 10 1 C
WSD407 Sustainable Product Design 10 2 C
MPD014 Polymer Engineering - Properties & Design 10 1 OA (2b)
WSD100 Structural Integrity 10 1 OA (2c)
WSC600 Advanced Manufacturing Processes and Technology 1 10 1 OB (1a)
WSC900 Computer Control and Instrumentation 10 1 OB (1e)
WSC201 Organisation Structure & Strategy 10 1 OC
WSC400 Design for Assembly 10 1 OD
WSD900 Mechatronics 20 1+2 OF (2e)
LAN*** University Wide Language 10 1 OG
WSD601 Advanced Manufacturing Processes and Technology 2 10 2 OH (2a)
WSD606 Additive Manufacturing and Reverse Engineering 10 2 OH (2d)
WSC206 Product Innovation Management 10 2 OI
WSC603 Metrology 10 2 OJ
WSC610 Healthcare Engineering 10 2 OK
WSC700 Sports Engineering 10 2 OK
WSC911 Industrial Machine Vision 10 2 OL
LAN*** University Wide Language 10 2 OM

 

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

 

 

4.6    Studies Overseas

Students may choose to study Semester 1 only, during their Part D at an approved Overseas Higher Education Institution.  The mix of subjects of the learning programme must first be approved by the Programme Director.  An acceptable learning programme must include a major group project and studies at an advanced/masters level with modular weight not less than 20.  

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 Criteria for Progression and Award of Degree

Progression from Part A to Part B, from Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D will be subject to the provisions set out in Regulation XX and in addition candidates must accumulate 120 credits and achieve an overall average of 55% in each part. 

To qualify for the award of the Degree of Masters of Engineering, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part D, with no module mark less then 30%.

 

5.2 Criteria for Candidates who do not meet the requirements for Progression or the Award of a Degree

Any candidate who fails to achieve the criteria for progression from Part A to Part B, Part B to Part C or Part C to Part D shall have the opportunity to repeat module assessments in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XX.  Alternatively, the candidate may elect to enter the BEng Honours Degree programme in Product Design Engineering, provided that the candidate has satisfied the criteria for progression on the BEng programme at the appropriate point.

Any candidate who, having successfully completed Part C, is unable to commence or complete Part D or who fails to achieve the criteria necessary for the award of MEng may, at the discretion of the Programme Board, be awarded the degree of BEng in Product Design Engineering with a classification corresponding to the candidate’s achievements in the Part B and Part C assessments and determined on the basis of the weightings given for the BEng programme.  

 

 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Candidate’s final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX.  The overall average percentage marks for each part will be combined in the ratio (Part B 20: Part C 40: Part D 40) to determine the overall average percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).

Programme Specification

MM MEng (Hons) Product Design Engineering (Students undertaking Part D in 2019)

Academic Year: 2019/20

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Institution of Engineering Designers (IED)

Institution of Mechanical Engineers (IMechE)

Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)

Final award MEng/ MEng+DIS/ MEng+DPS/MEng+DInts
Programme title Product Design Engineering
Programme code WSUM02
Length of programme The duration of the programme is 8 semesters, or 10 semesters if students undertake the additional period of study, normally between Parts B and C, leading to the award of the Diploma in Industrial Studies, the Diploma of International Studies, or the Diploma of Professional Studies.
UCAS code HHC7, HHD7
Admissions criteria

http://www.lboro.ac.uk/departments/meme/undergraduate/courses/

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

This programme aims to bridge the disciplines of mechanical engineering, manufacturing engineering and product design.  To provide design content which is  applicable to products, processes and systems.

  • A1.   To deliver in-depth knowledge and understanding of key aspects of engineering science, manufacturing engineering, innovation and appropriate management techniques.
  • A2.   To provide opportunities for students to develop appropriate design and project engineering skills, including dealing with open-ended problems and elements of uncertainty and risk.
  • A3.   To develop the ability to solve a broad range of engineering problems, some complex and novel, using contemporary ideas and techniques.
  • A4.   To enable students to manage their own learning, communicate effectively and make use of primary source materials.
  • A5.   To put human and project management theory into practice through team-working and opportunities for leadership experience.
  • A6.   To provide insight into engineering practice and commercial aspects of engineering and design.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015). 

  • Engineering Council (UK). ‘UK-SPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan.2014. 

  • Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014. 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:

  • K1.   the underpinning science, mathematics and other disciplines associated with careers related to product design engineering;
  • K2.   engineering principles, quantitative methods, mathematical and computer models;
  • K3.   the design processes and methodologies and the ability to manage a design project;
  • K4.   codes of practice, industry standards and quality issues, including new developments and limitations, as applicable to a product design engineering career;
  • K5.   intellectual property issues and of environmental, legal and ethical issues within the modern industrial world;
  • K6.   developing technologies in two areas of specialisation and an understanding of the broad range of concepts necessary for effective product design and manufacture;
  • K7.   management and business practices appropriate for a career in product design engineering and an understanding of the commercial and economic context and drivers of the engineering business;
  • K8.   the characteristics of engineering materials, equipment and processes and mechanical workshop practices.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

The MEng graduate will be able to use such knowledge and understanding in a creative way and be able to:

  • C1.   identify and define a design engineering problem in unfamiliar situations and generate innovative solutions:
  • C2.   apply and adapt appropriate methods to model such solutions and assess the limitations of each method;
  • C3.   analyse engineering solutions using contemporary computer-based systems and appreciate their limitations;
  • C4.   investigate new and emerging technologies using fundamental knowledge;
  • C5.   analyse, objectively evaluate and apply the principles of industrial design, engineering design and manufacturing design to product design and development;
  • C6.   extract, from given data, that which is pertinent to an unfamiliar problem and make use of it in finding a solution;
  • C7.   select appropriate data from a range of possible data sets and present them in alternative forms to create deeper understanding and/or greater impact;
  • C8.   integrate knowledge from all aspects of the programme, applying understanding to novel and challenging situations, while being aware of the limitations of solutions;
  • C9.   generate an innovative design for systems, components or processes to fulfil new needs.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • P1.   manage and lead the design process taking account of customer constraints such as cost, health and safety, risk and environmental issues;
  • P2.   apply engineering techniques taking account of a range of commercial and industrial constraints;
  • P3.   communicate product design ideas through the presentation of concept drawings, computer visualisations and conventional sketching;
  • P4.   prepare engineering drawings, computer visualisations and technical reports and give technically competent oral presentations;
  • P5.   research information and use new methods required for novel situations;
  • P6.   use appropriate computer software and laboratory equipment;
  • P7.   recognise the capabilities and limitations of computer based methods for engineering problem solving.
  • P8.   demonstrate advanced organisational and management skills.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • T1.   demonstrate a high level of numeracy;
  • T2.   apply creative and structured approaches to problem solving;
  • T3.   communicate effectively through written, graphical, interpersonal and presentation skills;
  • T4.   design and implement computer-based information systems;
  • T5.   work independently;
  • T6.   work in and lead a team;
  • T7.   organise and manage time and resources effectively;
  • T8.   learn new theories, concepts, methods etc. in an unfamiliar situation outside the discipline area.

4. Programme structure

4.1    Part A - Introductory Modules

 

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
MAA306 Mathematics for Manufacturing Engineering 20 1+2 C
MMA102 Engineering Science 1 20 1+2 C
MMA401 Product Design (Ergonomics & Visualisation) 20 1+2 C
MMA604 Materials and Manufacturing Processes 20 1+2 C
MMA400 Manufacturing Design 1 10 1 C
MMA501 Integrating Studies 1a 10 1 C
MMA504 Integrating Studies 1b 10 2 C
MMA900 Electronic and Electrical Technology 1 10 2 C

                

4.2    Part B - Degree Modules 

 

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
MMB501 Inegrating Studies 20 1+2 C
MMB504 Application of Product Design 20 1+2 C
MMB112 Engineering Science 2 10 1 C
MMB310 Engineering and Management Modelling 10 1 C
MMB400 Industrial Design 10 1 C
MMB610 Manufacturing Technology 10 1 C
MMA210 Manufacturing Management 10 2 C
MMB301 Software Engineering 10 2 C
MMB413 Machine Design 10 2 C
MAB206 Statistics 10 2 C

 

4.3    Part I – Optional Placement Year 

 

Code Title
WSI010 DIS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing)
WSI020 DPS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing)
WSI035 DIntS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing)

For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be followed between Part B and C or Parts C and D and will be in accordance with the provision of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.

 

4.4    Part C - Degree Modules

Students must choose 30 credits of Options (O).  Students MUST select 10 credits from Group A (OA) and no more than 10 credits from each group.

Modules indicated with ** are paired together.  For example, (1a) in part C is paired with (2a) in part D.  Similarly (1e) in Part D is paired with (2e) also in part D.  All students MUST COMPLETE AT LEAST TWO of these specialist module pairs during Part C or D.  The second module of a pair (numbered 2) may not be taken without the prerequisite module (numbered 1) but the preliminary modules may be studied independently. 

Code  Title   Weight Semester C/O 
WSC551 Individual Project 50 1+2 C
WSC200 Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality 10 1 C
WSC401 Product Design 10 1 C
WSC602 Sustainable Manufacturing 10 1 C
WSC606 Additive Manufacturing for Product Development 10 1 C (1d)
MPC012 Polymer Engineering 1: Processing 10 2 OA (1b)
WSC106 Finite Element Analysis 10 2 OA (1c)
WSC300 Product Information Systems - Computer Aided Design 10 2 OB
WSC203 Manufacturing Planning & Control 10 2 OC
WSC610 Healthcare Engineering 10 2 OD
WSC700 Sports Engineering 10 2 OD

 All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.  

 

4.5    Part D - Degree Modules           

At least 70 weight of level 7 (D modules) must be taken in Part D.

Students must choose 70 credits of options (O).  Students MUST select 10 credits from group A and 20 credits from group H.  The remaining 40 credits should be no more than 10 credits from each group (B-G, I-M).   Note there will be at least 20 weight of linked modules (follow on from pre-requisite modules in Part C) across both semesters.

Students who elect to study WSC900 (1e) must also study WSD900 (2e) in Part D.

Students cannot choose modules already studied in Part C.

 

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSD503 Project Engineering - Total Product Design 30 1+2 C
WSD207 Project Management 10 1 C
WSD407 Sustainable Product Design 10 2 C
MPD014 Polymer Engineering - Properties & Design 10 1 OA (2b)
WSD100 Structural Integrity 10 1 OA (2c)
WSC600 Advanced Manufacturing Processes and Technology 1 10 1 OB (1a)
WSC900 Computer Control and Instrumentation 10 1 OB (1e)
WSC201 Organisation Structure & Strategy 10 1 OC
WSC400 Design for Assembly 10 1 OD
WSD900 Mechatronics 20 1+2 OF (2e)
LAN*** University Wide Language 10 1 OG
WSD601 Advanced Manufacturing Processes and Technology 2 10 2 OH (2a)
WSD606 Additive Manufacturing and Reverse Engineering 10 2 OH (2d)
WSC206 Product Innovation Management 10 2 OI
WSC603 Metrology 10 2 OJ
WSC610 Healthcare Engineering 10 2 OK
WSC700 Sports Engineering 10 2 OK
WSC911 Industrial Machine Vision 10 2 OL
LAN*** University Wide Language 10 2 OM

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules. 

4.6    Studies Overseas

Students may choose to study Semester 1 only, during their Part D at an approved Overseas Higher Education Institution.  The mix of subjects of the learning programme must first be approved by the Programme Director.  An acceptable learning programme must include a major group project and studies at an advanced/masters level with modular weight not less than 20.  

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 Criteria for Progression and Award of Degree

Progression from Part A to Part B, from Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D will be subject to the provisions set out in Regulation XX and in addition candidates must accumulate 120 credits and achieve an overall average of 55% in each part. 

To qualify for the award of the Degree of Masters of Engineering, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part D, with no module mark less than 30%.

 

5.2 Criteria for Candidates who do not meet the requirements for progression or the Award of a Degree

Any candidate who fails to achieve the criteria for progression from Part A to Part B, Part B to Part C or Part C to Part D shall have the opportunity to repeat module assessments in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XX.  Alternatively, the candidate may elect to enter the BEng Honours Degree programme in Product Design Engineering, provided that the candidate has satisfied the criteria for progression on the BEng programme at the appropriate point.

Any candidate who, having successfully completed Part C, is unable to commence or complete Part D or who fails to achieve the criteria necessary for the award of MEng may, at the discretion of the Programme Board, be awarded the degree of BEng in Product Design Engineering with a classification corresponding to the candidate’s achievements in the Part B and Part C assessments and determined on the basis of the weightings given for the BEng programme.  

 

 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Candidate’s final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX.  The overall average percentage marks for each part will be combined in the ratio (Part B 20: Part C 40: Part D 40) to determine the overall average percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).

Programme Specification

MM MEng (Hons) Mechanical Engineering (2018 Entry)

Academic Year: 2019/20

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)

Institution of Mechanical Engineers (IMechE)

Final award MEng / MEng+DIS / MEng+DPS / MEng+DInts
Programme title Mechanical Engineering
Programme code WSUM03
Length of programme The duration of the programme is either 8 semesters, or 10 semesters if the students undertake the additional period of study normally between Parts B and C for the award of the Diploma of Industrial Studies, the Diploma of International Studies or the Diploma of Professional Studies.
UCAS code H302, H303
Admissions criteria

MEng - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/h303

 

MEng+DIS /DInts - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/h302

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

Aims:

  • A1.   To prepare highly skilled graduates to meet the business and leadership requirements of industry and to pursue careers in Mechanical Engineering across a range of industries and activities including design, development, and analysis of complex systems
  • A2.   To provide as high-quality learning experience across a complete range of core subjects in order to give students the necessary technical skills to understand mechanical systems and solve engineering problems
  • A3.   To promote high-quality engineering practice by applying appropriate knowledge, skills, tools and techniques in the analysis, diagnosis and solution of industry-related problems.
  • A4.   To develop engineers capable of designing systems and managing the development process in order to deliver solutions that meet the requirements of customers
  • A5.   To impart an appreciation of the essential practical and commercial, ethical, business, sustainability and legal constraints of professional engineering
  • A6.   To support personal and professional development and foster creativity, develop design capability and teach the communication skills necessary to put ideas into practice

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015) 
  • Engineering Council (UK). ‘UK-SPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan 2014 

  • Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:

  • K1.   The underpinning scientific, mathematical and engineering principles associated with mechanical engineering;
  • K2.   The characteristics of engineering materials, equipment and processes and an awareness of basis mechanical workshop practices;
  • K3.   Engineering principles, quantitative methods, mathematical and computer models;
  • K4.   Relevant codes of practice and regulatory framework and operational practices for safe operation of engineering processes;
  • K5.   Recognise the professional and ethic responsibilities of engineers;
  • K6.   Principles of industrial design, engineering design and manufacturing design;
  • K7.   Management techniques and an understanding of the commercial and economical context of the engineering business.
  • K8.   Developing technologies  in areas of specialization and understanding of concepts from areas peripheral to mechanical engineering, including a thorough appreciation of microprocessors and machine control software.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • C1.   Apply the principles of engineering science in developing solutions to practical mechanical engineering problems;
  • C2.   Create new engineering components and processes through the synthesis of ideas from a range of sources using appropriate design principles, techniques and codes of practice;
  • C3.   Integrate, evaluate and make use of information and data from a wide variety of sources including other engineering disciplines;
  • C4.   Generate innovative designs by evaluating and responding to customer needs, including fitness for purpose and cost;
  • C5.   Analyse complex mechanical systems, processes and components;
  • C6.   Investigate and define engineering problems within the framework of economic, social, ethical and environmental issues and show the ability to assess risk;
  • C7.   Investigate new and emerging technologies using fundamental knowledge and learn new theories, concepts and methods in an familiar situations.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • P1.   Apply computer-based and mathematical methods to the modelling and analysis of engineering system, components and products;
  • P2.   Define and solve practical engineering problems;
  • P3.   Use laboratory and basis workshop equipment in an appropriate and safe manner;
  • P4.   Generate ideas for new products and develop and evaluate a range of new solutions;
  • P5.   Gather and interpret information and evaluate designs;
  • P6.   Demonstrate the ability to manage the design process and apply appropriate techniques and codes of practice to the design of components and systems;
  • P7.   Prepare mechanical engineering drawings, computer-graphics and technical reports and give technically competent oral presentations;
  • P8.   Apply relevant codes of practice and industry standards;
  • P9.   Demonstrate the ability to work with technical uncertainty;
  • P10.  Demonstrate high levels of organizational and project management skills.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • T1.   Demonstrate a high level of numeracy;
  • T2.   Search and retrieve information, ideas and data from a variety of sources;
  • T3.   Adopt systematic approach to the solution of unfamiliar problems;
  • T4.   Select and analyse appropriate evidence and data to solve problems;
  • T5.   Solve problems applying engineering techniques and tools;
  • T6.   Communicate effectively by means of technical reports, papers, graphical aids, interpersonal and presentational skills;
  • T7.   Design and implement basic computer based information systems;
  • T8.   Organise and manage time and resources effectively: develop work plans, take responsibility for their execution;
  • T9.   Undertake most of the technical roles within a team and exercise leadership;
  • T10.  Plan self-learning and improve performance, as the foundation for lifelong learning.

4. Programme structure

4.1    Part A - Introductory Modules

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
MAA310 Mathematics for Mechanical Engineering 20 1+2 C
WSA101 Statics and Dynamics 20 1+2 C
WSA508 Engineering Principles & Professional Skills 20 1+2 C
WSA604 Materials & Manufacturing Processes 20 1+2 C
WSA800 Thermodynamics and Fluid Mechanics 20 1+2 C
WSA901 Electronic Systems for Mechanical Processes 10 1 C
WSA100 Mechanics of Materials 10 2 C

 
4.2 Part B  - Degree Modules

 

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSB300 Engineering Computation 10 1+2 C
WSB500 Application of Engineering Design: Industry Based Project  10 1+2 C
MAB110 Mathematics for Mechanical Engineering 3 10 1 C
WSB100 Mechanics of Materials 2 10 1 C
WSB101 Engineering Dynamics 2 10 1 C
WSB104 Control Engineering 10 1 C
WSB800 Thermodynamics 2 10 1 C
WSB045 Electrical Power & Machines 10 2 C
WSB403 Design of Machine Elements 10 2 C
WSB404 Computer Aided Design, Manufacture and Test (CADMAT) 10 2 C
WSB801 Heat Transfer 10 2 C
WSB802 Fluid Mechanics 2 10 2 C

      

4.3    Part I – Optional Placement Year

 

Code Title
WSI010 DIS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing)
WSI020 DPS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing)
WSI035 DIntS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing)

 

For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C or Part C and D and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.

 

4.4 Part C - Degree Modules  


Students MUST choose 20 credits of options (O) in Semester One and 30 credits in Semester Two.

TWO modules (20 credits) must be selected from Group A or Group B (both from the same group), OR ONE module from Group A or B and ONE module from Group C.

ONE module (10 credits) must be selected from each of Group D, E, F and G.  Modules in Group D and E are paired with modules in Part D.

 

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSD550 Individual Project 50 1+2 C
WSC200 Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality 10 1 C
WSC900 Computer Control and Instrumentation 10 1 C
WSC801 Advanced Heat Transfer 10 1 OA
WSC804 Energy Systems Analysis 10 1 OA
WSC910 Laser Materials Processing 10 1 OA
WSC104 Robotics and Control 10 1 OB
WSC107 Contacts Mechanics: Tribology 10 1 OB
LAN*** University Wide Language 10 1 OC
WSC101 Vibration and Noise 10 2 OD (1a)
WSC105 Kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery 10 2 OD (1b)
WSC106 Finite Element Analysis 10 2 OE (1c)
WSC802 Computation Fluid Dynamics I 10 2 OE (1d)
MPC012 Polymer Engineering - Processing and Manufacture 10 2 OE (1e)
WSC301 Computer Aided Engineering 10 2 OF
WSC803 Ballistics and Rocket Propulsion 10 2 OF
MPC014 Materials in Service 10 2 OF
MPC102 Fracture and Failure 10 2 OF
LAN*** University Wide Language 10 2 OF
WSC911 Industrial Machine Vision 10 2 OG

 

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

 

 

4.5 Part D - Degree Modules


Students must choose 40 credits of optional modules (O) in Semester One and 40 credits in Semester Two.

ONE module (10 credits) must be from Group A. TWO modules (20 credits) must be from Group B.  Modules in Group B are linked to modules in Part C.

ONE module (10 credits) must be from Group C.

No more than ONE module to be chosen from each of Groups D, E, F or G.

Students cannot register for modules already studied in Part C.

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSD403 Engineering Design Management 10 1 C
WSD503 Project Engineering - Total Product Design 30 1+2 C
BSD523 Enterprise Technology 10 1 OA
WSD500 Project Leadership 10 1 OA
WSD100 Structural Integrity 10 1 OB (2c)
WSD101 Drive Train Dynamics 10 1 OB
WSD102 Non-Linear Dynamics 10 1 OB (2a)
WSD802 Computational Fluid Dynamics 2 10 1 OB (2d)
MPD014 Polymer Engineering 2 - Properties and Design 10 1 OB (2e)
WSC602 Sustainable Manufacturing 10 1 OC
WSC606 Additive Manufacturing for Product Development 10 1 OC
WSD900 Mechatronics 20 1+2 OC
LAN*** University Wide Language 10 1 OC
WSD902 Laser & Optical Measurements 20 2 OC
WSC301 Computer Aided Engineering 10 2 OD
WSC800 Internal Combustion Engines 20 2 OD
WSC803 Ballistics and Rocket Propulsion 10 2 OD
WSC610 Healthcare Engineering 10 2 OE
WSC700 Sports Engineering 10 2 OE
WSD407 Sustainable Product Design 10 2 OF
WSD606 Additive Manufacturing and Reverse Engineering 10 2 OF
LAN*** University Wide Language 10 2 OG

 

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

 

4.6  Studies Overseas

Students may choose to study Semester 1 (only) during their Part D, at an approved Overseas Higher Education Institution.  The mix of subjects of the learning programme must first be approved by the programme director for their course.  An acceptable learning programme should, where possible, include a group project and studies at an advanced/masters level. 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 Criteria for Progression and Degree Award 

Progression from Part A to Part B, from Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D will be subject to the provisions set out in Regulation XX and in addition candidates must accumulate 120 credits and achieve an overall average of 55% in each part.

To qualify for the award of the Degree of Master of Engineering, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part D, with no module mark less than 30%.

 

5.2 Criteria for candidates who do not meet the requirements for Progression or the award of a Degree.

Any candidate who fails to achieve the criteria for progression from Part A to Part B, Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D shall have the opportunity to repeat Module Assessments in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XX.  Alternatively, the candidate may elect to enter the BEng degree programme in Mechanical Engineering, before commencing Part C, provided that the candidate has satisfied the criteria for progression for that programme at the appropriate point.

In exceptional circumstances, any candidate who, having successfully completed Part C, is unable to commence or complete Part D or fails to achieve the criteria necessary for the award of the degree of MEng may, at the discretion of the Programme Board, be awarded the degree of BEng in Mechanical Engineering with a classification corresponding to the candidate’s achievements in the Part B and Part C assessments and determined on the basis of the weightings given for the BEng programme. 

 

 

              

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level modules assessments in Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks will be combined in the ratio Part B - 20, Part C - 40, Part D – 40 to determine the overall average percentage mark for the programme (the programme mark).

 

Programme Specification

MM MEng (Hons) Mechanical Engineering (Students undertaking Part C in 2019)

Academic Year: 2019/20

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)

Institution of Mechanical Engineers (IMechE)

Final award MEng / MEng+DIS / MEng+DPS / MEng+DInts
Programme title Mechanical Engineering
Programme code WSUM03
Length of programme The duration of the programme is either 8 semesters, or 10 semesters if the students undertake the additional period of study normally between Parts B and C for the award of the Diploma of Industrial Studies, the Diploma of International Studies or the Diploma of Professional Studies.
UCAS code H302, H303
Admissions criteria

MEng - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/h303

MEng+DIS /DInts - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/h302

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

Aims:

  • A1.   To prepare highly skilled graduates to pursue careers in Mechanical Engineering across a range of industries and activities including design, development, and analysis of complex systems
  • A2.   To provide as high-quality learning experience across a complete range of core subjects in order to give students the necessary technical skills to understand mechanical systems and solve engineering problems
  • A3.   To promote high-quality engineering practice by applying appropriate knowledge, skills, tools and techniques in the analysis, diagnosis and solution of industry-related problems.
  • A4.   To develop engineers capable of designing systems and managing the development process in order to deliver solutions that meet the requirements of customers
  • A5.   To impart an appreciation of the essential practical and commercial, ethical, business, sustainability and legal constraints of professional engineering
  • A6.   To support personal and professional development and foster creativity, develop design capability and teach the communication skills necessary to put ideas into practice

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015) 
  • Engineering Council (UK). ‘UK-SPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan 2014 

  • Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:

  • K1.   The underpinning scientific, mathematical and engineering principles associated with mechanical engineering;
  • K2.   The characteristics of engineering materials, equipment and processes and an awareness of basis mechanical workshop practices;
  • K3.   Engineering principles, quantitative methods, mathematical and computer models;
  • K4.   Relevant codes of practice and regulatory framework and operational practices for safe operation of engineering processes;
  • K5.   Recognise the professional and ethic responsibilities of engineers;
  • K6.   Principles of industrial design, engineering design and manufacturing design;
  • K7.   Management techniques and an understanding of the commercial and economical context of the engineering business.
  • K8.   Developing technologies  in areas of specialization and understanding of concepts from areas peripheral to mechanical engineering, including a thorough appreciation of microprocessors and machine control software.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • C1.   Apply the principles of engineering science in developing solutions to practical mechanical engineering problems;
  • C2.   Create new engineering components and processes through the synthesis of ideas from a range of sources using appropriate design principles, techniques and codes of practice;
  • C3.   Integrate, evaluate and make use of information and data from a wide variety of sources including other engineering disciplines;
  • C4.   Generate innovative designs by evaluating and responding to customer needs, including fitness for purpose and cost;
  • C5.   Analyse complex mechanical systems, processes and components;
  • C6.   Investigate and define engineering problems within the framework of economic, social, ethical and environmental issues and show the ability to assess risk;
  • C7.   Investigate new and emerging technologies using fundamental knowledge and learn new theories, concepts and methods in an familiar situations.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • P1.   Apply computer-based and mathematical methods to the modelling and analysis of engineering system, components and products;
  • P2.   Define and solve practical engineering problems;
  • P3.   Use laboratory and basis workshop equipment in an appropriate and safe manner;
  • P4.   Generate ideas for new products and develop and evaluate a range of new solutions;
  • P5.   Gather and interpret information and evaluate designs;
  • P6.   Demonstrate the ability to manage the design process and apply appropriate techniques and codes of practice to the design of components and systems;
  • P7.   Prepare mechanical engineering drawings, computer-graphics and technical reports and give technically competent oral presentations;
  • P8.   Apply relevant codes of practice and industry standards;
  • P9.   Demonstrate the ability to work with technical uncertainty;
  • P10.  Demonstrate high levels of organizational and project management skills.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • T1.   Demonstrate a high level of numeracy;
  • T2.   Search and retrieve information, ideas and data from a variety of sources;
  • T3.   Adopt systematic approach to the solution of unfamiliar problems;
  • T4.   Select and analyse appropriate evidence and data to solve problems;
  • T5.   Solve problems applying engineering techniques and tools;
  • T6.   Communicate effectively by means of technical reports, papers, graphical aids, interpersonal and presentational skills;
  • T7.   Design and implement basic computer based information systems;
  • T8.   Organise and manage time and resources effectively: develop work plans, take responsibility for their execution;
  • T9.   Undertake most of the technical roles within a team and exercise leadership;
  • T10.  Plan self-learning and improve performance, as the foundation for lifelong learning.

4. Programme structure

4.1    Part A - Introductory Modules

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
MAA310 Mathematics for Mechanical Engineering 20 1+2 C
MMA101 Statics and Dynamics 20 1+2 C
MMA508 Engineering Principles & Professional Skills 20 1+2 C
MMA604 Materials & Manufacturing Processes 20 1+2 C
MMA800 Thermodynamics and Fluid Mechanics 20 1+2 C
MMA901 Electronic Systems for Mechanical Processes 10 1 C
MMA100 Mechanics of Materials 10 2 C

 
4.2 Part B  - Degree Modules

 

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSB300 Engineering Computation 10 1+2 C
WSB500 Application of Engineering Design: Industry Based Project  10 1+2 C
MAB110 Mathematics for Mechanical Engineering 10 1 C
WSB100 Mechanics of Materials 2 10 1 C
WSB101 Engineering Dynamics 2 10 1 C
WSB104 Control Engineering 10 1 C
WSB800 Thermodynamics 2 10 1 C
WSB045 Electrical Power & Machines 10 2 C
WSB403 Design of Machine Elements 10 2 C
WSB404 Computer Aided Design, Manufacture and Test (CADMAT) 10 2 C
WSB801 Heat Transfer 10 2 C
WSB802 Fluid Mechanics 10 2 C

      

4.3    Part I – Optional Placement Year

 

Code Title
WSI010 DIS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing)
WSI020 DPS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing)
WSI035 DIntS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing)

 

For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C or Part C and D and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.

 

4.4 Part C - Degree Modules  


Students MUST choose 20 credits of options (O) in Semester One and 30 credits in Semester Two.

TWO modules (20 credits) must be selected from Group A or Group B (both from the same group), OR ONE module from Group A or B and ONE module from Group C.

ONE module (10 credits) must be selected from each of Group D, E, F and G.  Modules in Group D and E are paired with modules in Part D.

 

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSD550 Individual Project 50 1+2 C
WSC200 Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality 10 1 C
WSC900 Computer Control and Instrumentation 10 1 C
WSC801 Advanced Heat Transfer 10 1 OA
WSC804 Energy Systems Analysis 10 1 OA
WSC910 Laser Materials Processing 10 1 OA
WSC104 Robotics and Control 10 1 OB
WSC107 Contacts Mechanics: Tribology 10 1 OB
LAN*** University Wide Language 10 1 OC
WSC101 Vibration and Noise 10 2 OD (1a)
WSC105 Kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery 10 2 OD (1b)
WSC106 Finite Element Analysis 10 2 OE (1c)
WSC802 Computation Fluid Dynamics I 10 2 OE (1d)
MPC012 Polymer Engineering - Processing and Manufacture 10 2 OE (1e)
WSC301 Computer Aided Engineering 10 2 OF
WSC803 Ballistics and Rocket Propulsion 10 2 OF
MPC014 Materials in Service 10 2 OF
MPC102 Fracture and Failure 10 2 OF
LAN*** University Wide Language 10 2 OF
WSC911 Industrial Machine Vision 10 2 OG

 

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

4.5 Part D - Degree Modules


Students must choose 40 credits of optional modules (O) in Semester One and 40 credits in Semester Two.

ONE module (10 credits) must be from Group A. TWO modules (20 credits) must be from Group B.  Modules in Group B are linked to modules in Part C.

ONE module (10 credits) must be from Group C.

No more than ONE module to be chosen from each of groups D, E, F, or G.

Students cannot register for modules already studied in Part C.

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSD403 Engineering Design Management 10 1 C
WSD503 Project Engineering 30 1+2 C
BSD523 Enterprise Technology 10 1 OA
WSD500 Project Leadership 10 1 OA
WSD100 Structural Integrity 10 1 OB (2c)
WSD101 Drive Train Dynamics 10 1 OB
WSD102 Non-Linear Dynamics 10 1 OB (2a)
WSD105 Dynamics of Engineering 10 1 OB (2b)
WSD802 Computational Fluid Dynamics 2 10 1 OB (2d)
MPD014 Polymer Engineering 2 - Properties and Design 10 1 OB (2e)
WSC602 Sustainable Manufacturing 10 1 OC
WSC606 Additive Manufacturing for Product Development 10 1 OC
WSD900 Mechatronics 20 1+2 OC
WSD902 Laser & Optical Measurements 10 2 OC
LAN*** University Wide Language 10 1 OC
WSC301 Computer Aided Engineering 10 2 OD
WSC800 Internal Combustion Engines 20 2 OD
WSC803 Ballistics and Rocket Propulsion 10 2 OD
WSC610 Healthcare Engineering 10 2 OE
WSC700 Sports Engineering 10 2 OE
WSD407 Sustainable Product Design 10 2 OF
WSD606 Additive Manufacturing and Reverse Engineering 10 2 OF
LAN*** University Wide Language 10 2 OG

 

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

 

  

4.7  Studies Overseas

Students may choose to study Semester 1 (only) during their Part D, at an approved Overseas Higher Education Institution.  The mix of subjects of the learning programme must first be approved by the programme director for their course.  An acceptable learning programme should, where possible, include a group project and studies at an advanced/masters level. 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 Criteria for Progression and Degree Award 

Progression from Part A to Part B, from Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D will be subject to the provisions set out in Regulation XX and in addition candidates must accumulate 120 credits and achieve an overall average of 55% in each part.

To qualify for the award of the Degree of Master of Engineering, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part D, with no module mark less than 30%.

 

5.2 Criteria for candidates who do not meet the requirements for Progression or the award of a Degree.

Any candidate who fails to achieve the criteria for progression from Part A to Part B, Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D shall have the opportunity to repeat Module Assessments in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XX.  Alternatively, the candidate may elect to enter the BEng degree programme in Mechanical Engineering, before commencing Part C, provided that the candidate has satisfied the criteria for progression for that programme at the appropriate point.

In exceptional circumstances, any candidate who, having successfully completed Part C, is unable to commence or complete Part D or fails to achieve the criteria necessary for the award of the degree of MEng may, at the discretion of the Programme Board, be awarded the degree of BEng in Mechanical Engineering with a classification corresponding to the candidate’s achievements in the Part B and Part C assessments and determined on the basis of the weightings given for the BEng programme. 

 

 

              

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level modules assessments in Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks will be combined in the ratio Part B - 20, Part C - 40, Part D – 40 to determine the overall average percentage mark for the programme (the programme mark).

 

Programme Specification

MM MEng (Hons) Mechanical Engineering (Students undertaking Part D in 2019)

Academic Year: 2019/20

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)

Institution of Mechanical Engineers (IMechE)

Final award MEng / MEng+DIS / MEng+DPS / MEng+DIntS
Programme title Mechanical Engineering
Programme code WSUM03
Length of programme The duration of the programme is either 8 semesters, or 10 semesters if the students undertake the additional period of study normally between Parts B and C for the award of the Diploma of Industrial Studies, the Diploma of International Studies or the Diploma of Professional Studies.
UCAS code H302, H303
Admissions criteria

MEng - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/h303

MEng+DIS /DInts - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/h302

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

Aims:

  • A1.   To prepare highly skilled graduates to pursue careers in Mechanical Engineering across a range of industries and activities including design, development, and analysis of complex systems
  • A2.   To provide as high-quality learning experience across a complete range of core subjects in order to give students the necessary technical skills to understand mechanical systems and solve engineering problems
  • A3.   To promote high-quality engineering practice by applying appropriate knowledge, skills, tools and techniques in the analysis, diagnosis and solution of industry-related problems.
  • A4.   To develop engineers capable of designing systems and managing the development process in order to deliver solutions that meet the requirements of customers
  • A5.   To impart an appreciation of the essential practical and commercial, ethical, business, sustainability and legal constraints of professional engineering
  • A6.   To support personal and professional development and foster creativity, develop design capability and teach the communication skills necessary to put ideas into practice

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015) 
  • Engineering Council (UK). ‘UK-SPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan 2014 

  • Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:

  • K1.   The underpinning scientific, mathematical and engineering principles associated with mechanical engineering;
  • K2.   The characteristics of engineering materials, equipment and processes and an awareness of basis mechanical workshop practices;
  • K3.   Engineering principles, quantitative methods, mathematical and computer models;
  • K4.   Relevant codes of practice and regulatory framework and operational practices for safe operation of engineering processes;
  • K5.   Recognise the professional and ethic responsibilities of engineers;
  • K6.   Principles of industrial design, engineering design and manufacturing design;
  • K7.   Management techniques and an understanding of the commercial and economical context of the engineering business.
  • K8.   Developing technologies  in areas of specialization and understanding of concepts from areas peripheral to mechanical engineering, including a thorough appreciation of microprocessors and machine control software.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • C1.   Apply the principles of engineering science in developing solutions to practical mechanical engineering problems;
  • C2.   Create new engineering components and processes through the synthesis of ideas from a range of sources using appropriate design principles, techniques and codes of practice;
  • C3.   Integrate, evaluate and make use of information and data from a wide variety of sources including other engineering disciplines;
  • C4.   Generate innovative designs by evaluating and responding to customer needs, including fitness for purpose and cost;
  • C5.   Analyse complex mechanical systems, processes and components;
  • C6.   Investigate and define engineering problems within the framework of economic, social, ethical and environmental issues and show the ability to assess risk;
  • C7.   Investigate new and emerging technologies using fundamental knowledge and learn new theories, concepts and methods in an familiar situations.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • P1.   Apply computer-based and mathematical methods to the modelling and analysis of engineering system, components and products;
  • P2.   Define and solve practical engineering problems;
  • P3.   Use laboratory and basis workshop equipment in an appropriate and safe manner;
  • P4.   Generate ideas for new products and develop and evaluate a range of new solutions;
  • P5.   Gather and interpret information and evaluate designs;
  • P6.   Demonstrate the ability to manage the design process and apply appropriate techniques and codes of practice to the design of components and systems;
  • P7.   Prepare mechanical engineering drawings, computer-graphics and technical reports and give technically competent oral presentations;
  • P8.   Apply relevant codes of practice and industry standards;
  • P9.   Demonstrate the ability to work with technical uncertainty;
  • P10.  Demonstrate high levels of organizational and project management skills.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • T1.   Demonstrate a high level of numeracy;
  • T2.   Search and retrieve information, ideas and data from a variety of sources;
  • T3.   Adopt systematic approach to the solution of unfamiliar problems;
  • T4.   Select and analyse appropriate evidence and data to solve problems;
  • T5.   Solve problems applying engineering techniques and tools;
  • T6.   Communicate effectively by means of technical reports, papers, graphical aids, interpersonal and presentational skills;
  • T7.   Design and implement basic computer based information systems;
  • T8.   Organise and manage time and resources effectively: develop work plans, take responsibility for their execution;
  • T9.   Undertake most of the technical roles within a team and exercise leadership;
  • T10.  Plan self-learning and improve performance, as the foundation for lifelong learning.

4. Programme structure

4.1    Part A - Introductory Modules

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
MAA310 Mathematics for Mechanical Engineering 20 1+2 C
MMA101 Statics and Dynamics 20 1+2 C
MMA508 Engineering Principles & Professional Skills 20 1+2 C
MMA604 Materials & Manufacturing Processes 20 1+2 C
MMA800 Thermodynamics and Fluid Mechanics 20 1+2 C
MMA901 Electronic Systems for Mechanical Processes 10 1 C
MMA100 Mechanics of Materials 10 2 C

 
4.2 Part B  - Degree Modules

 

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
MMB300 Engineering Computation 10 1+2 C
MMB500 Application of Engineering Design: Industry Based Project  10 1+2 C
MAB110 Mathematics for Mechanical Engineering 10 1 C
MMB100 Mechanics of Materials 2 10 1 C
MMB101 Engineering Dynamics 2 10 1 C
MMB104 Control Engineering 10 1 C
MMB800 Thermodynamics 2 10 1 C
ELB045 Electrical Power & Machines 10 2 C
MMB403 Design of Machine Elements 10 2 C
MMB404 Computer Aided Design, Manufacture and Test (CADMAT) 10 2 C
MMB801 Heat Transfer 10 2 C
MMB802 Fluid Mechanics 10 2 C

      

4.3    Part I – Optional Placement Year

 

Code Title
WSI010 DIS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing)
WSI020 DPS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing)
WSI035 DIntS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing)

For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be followed between Parts B or C and Parts C and D and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.

 

 

4.4 Part C - Degree Modules  


Students MUST choose 20 credits of options (O) in Semester One and 30 credits in Semester Two.

TWO modules (20 credits) must be selected from Group A or Group B (both from the same group), OR ONE module from Group A or B and ONE module from Group C.

ONE module (10 credits) must be selected from each of Group D, E and F.  Modules in Group D and E are paired with modules in Part D.

 

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSD550 Individual Project 50 1+2 C
WSC200 Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality 10 1 C
WSC900 Computer Control & Instrumentation 10 1 C
WSC801 Advanced Heat Transfer 10 1 OA
WSC804 Energy Systems Analysis 10 1 OA
WSC910 Laser Materials Processing 10 1 OA
WSC104 Robotics and Control 10 1 OB
WSC107 Contacts Mechanics: Tribology 10 1 OB
WSC911 Industrial Machine Vision 10 1 OB
LAN*** University Wide Language 10 1 OC
WSC101 Vibration and Noise 10 2 OD (1a)
WSC105 Kinematics of Machinery 10 2 OD (1b)
WSC106 Finite Element Analysis 10 2 OE (1c)
WSC802 Computation Fluid Dynamics 10 2 OE (1d)
MPC012 Polymer Engineering - Processing & Manufacture 10 2 OE (1e)
WSC301 Computer Aided Engineering 10 2 OF
WSC803 Ballistics and Rocket Propulsion 10 2 OF
MPC014 Materials in Service 10 2 OF
MPC102 Fracture and Failure 10 2 OF
LAN*** University Wide Language 10 2 OF

 

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

 

  

4.5 Part D - Degree Modules


Students must choose 40 credits of optional modules (O) in Semester One and 40 credits in Semester Two.

ONE module (10 credits) must be from Group A. TWO modules (20 credits) must be from Group B.  Modules in Group B are linked to modules in Part C.

ONE module (10 credits) must be from Group C.

No more than ONE module to be chosen from each of Groups D, E, F or G

Students cannot register for modules already studied in Part C.

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSD403 Engineering Design Management 10 1 C
WSD503 Project Engineering - Total Product Design 30 1+2 C
BSD523 Enterprise Technology 10 1 OA
WSD500 Project Leadership 10 1 OA
WSD100 Structural Integrity 10 1 OB (2c)
WSD102 Non-Linear Dynamics 10 1 OB (2a)
WSD101 Drive Train Dynamics 10 1 OB
WSD802 Computational Fluid Dynamics 2 10 1 OB (2d)
MPD014 Polymer Engineering 2 - Properties and Design 10 1 OB (2e)
WSC602 Sustainable Manufacturing 10 1 OC
WSC606 Additive Manufacturing for Product Development 10 1 OC
WSD900 Mechatronics 20 1+2 OC
LAN*** University Wide Language (Level 3 and above) 10 1 OC
WSC301 Computer Aided Engineering 10 2 OD
WSC800 Internal Combustion Engines 20 2 OD
WSC803 Ballistics and Rocket Propulsion 10 2 OD
WSC610 Healthcare Engineering 10 2 OE
WSC700 Sports Engineering 10 2 OE
WSD902 Laser & Optical Measurements 20 2 OE
WSD407 Sustainable Product Design 10 2 OF
WSD606 Additive Manufacturing and Reverse Engineering 10 2 OF
LAN*** University Wide Language (Level 3 and above) 10 2 OG

 

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

 

 

 

4.7  Studies Overseas

Students may choose to study Semester 1 (only) during their Part D, at an approved Overseas Higher Education Institution.  The mix of subjects of the learning programme must first be approved by the programme director for their course.  An acceptable learning programme should, where possible, include a group project and studies at an advanced/masters level. 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 Criteria for Progression and Degree Award 

Progression from Part A to Part B, from Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D will be subject to the provisions set out in Regulation XX and in addition candidates must accumulate 120 credits and achieve an overall average of 55% in each part. 

To qualify for the award of the Degree of Master of Engineering, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part D, with no module mark less than 30%.

 

5.2 Criteria for candidates who do not meet the requirements for Progression or the award of a Degree.

Any candidate who fails to achieve the criteria for progression from Part A to Part B, Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D shall have the opportunity to repeat Module Assessments in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XX.  Alternatively, the candidate may elect to enter the BEng degree programme in Mechanical Engineering, before commencing Part C, provided that the candidate has satisfied the criteria for progression for that programme at the appropriate point.

In exceptional circumstances, any candidate who, having successfully completed Part C, is unable to commence or complete Part D or fails to achieve the criteria necessary for the award of the degree of MEng may, at the discretion of the Programme Board, be awarded the degree of BEng in Mechanical Engineering with a classification corresponding to the candidate’s achievements in the Part B and Part C assessments and determined on the basis of the weightings given for the BEng programme. 

              

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level modules assessments in Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks will be combined in the ratio Part B - 20, Part C - 40, Part D – 40 to determine the overall average percentage mark for the programme (the programme mark).

 

Programme Specification

MM MEng (Hons) Innovative Manufacturing Engineering (Students undertaking Part D in 2019)

Academic Year: 2019/20

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)
Institution of Mechanical Engineers (IMechE)

Final award MEng
Programme title Innovative Manufacturing Engineering
Programme code WSUM06
Length of programme The duration of the programme is 8 semesters.
UCAS code H790
Admissions criteria

http://www.lboro.ac.uk/departments/meme/undergraduate/courses/

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The overall aim of this programme is to equip students with the knowledge, understanding, key skills and attributes to make a substantial impact in manufacturing enterprises and to become future leaders. This is achieved through a combination of taught courses held at the University and integrated industrial placements. Together, these enable rapid development both technically and managerially through observation of the theory applied in an industrial context.

Specific aims are:

•      A1.   To train passionate and capable manufacturing engineers on a degree programme with strong partnership between higher education and industry.

•      A2.   To demonstrate, through active learning opportunities, the rewarding and highly varied career opportunities that exist in manufacturing engineering.

•      A3.   To produce high quality graduates with a strong academic background, combined with excellent communication skills and the ability to progress rapidly to a position of responsibility, and to become future technical and managerial leaders.

•      A4.   To integrate significant industrial experience, such that graduates are able to make a strong and immediate contribution to engineering businesses.

•      A5.   To deliver technical depth in core engineering subjects and specialist applications leading to a broad understanding of engineering knowledge, and a critical awareness of current insights in the fields of manufacturing engineering and manufacturing management.

•      A6.   To encourage students to manage their own learning and make use of primary source materials to solve complex problems individually and in teams.

•      A7.   To foster a holistic appreciation of the essential practical, commercial and social aspects of engineering.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015). 

  • Engineering Council (UK). ‘UK-SPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan.2014. 

  • Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014. 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:

  • K1.   the underpinning science, mathematics and other disciplines associated with a career in manufacturing engineering;
  • K2.   engineering principles and relevant numerical methods and an understanding of the role of information technology in providing support for manufacturing engineers;
  • K3.   codes of practice, industry standards and quality issues applicable to a career in manufacturing;
  • K4.   the management of manufacturing methods and the wider business background appropriate to the organisation of a manufacturing enterprise;
  • K5.   the commercial and economic context, together with the importance of sustainability, legal, ethical and intellectual property issues within the modern industrial world;
  • K6.   material properties, manufacturing processes and technologies, their limitations and applicability, with an awareness of new developments in these areas;
  • K7.   the design process related to the manufacturing arena.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

The MEng graduate will also be able to use such knowledge and understanding in a creative way and be able to:

  • C1.   define an unfamiliar manufacturing related problem, evaluate its technical and business requirements and generate innovative solutions that consider the system as a whole including constraints such as economics, production capabilities and sustainability;
  • C2.   apply appropriate methods (including analytical and computational methods) to model and critically assess such solutions making allowance for uncertainty in the information available;
  • C3.   investigate methods to continuously improve manufacturing processes for enhanced quality, sustainability and economics;
  • C4.   research data and fundamental knowledge from other disciplines and apply the relevant aspects in the solution of unfamiliar problems;
  • C5.   understand the role of other engineering disciplines and their technical and business constraints.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • P1.   use appropriate computer software numerical modelling methods and/or computational techniques to solve engineering problems;
  • P2.   use laboratory and mechanical workshop equipment competently and safely;
  • P3.   research information from a wide range of sources;
  • P4.   prepare engineering drawings and other technical data and present it in alternative forms to create good understanding and/or impact;
  • P5.   manage the manufacturing related design process taking account of customer constraints such as cost, health and safety and risk.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • T1.   critically evaluate an existing or proposed technology;
  • T2.   use a range of computer based systems and adapt them to other applications;
  • T3.   communicate effectively through written, graphical, interpersonal and presentation skills;
  • T4.   monitor and adjust a personal programme of work on an on-going basis and learn independently;
  • T5.   develop, monitor and update a plan for themselves and/or others, to reflect changing requirements;
  • T6.   gather information from a range of sources, collate it and present its key findings;
  • T7.   undertake different roles within a team including leadership.

4. Programme structure

Candidates will normally be expected to complete a four week (minimum) period of industrial experience with a consortium company, if available, or other relevant work experience in lieu, as agreed by the Programme Director, after part A studies and before commencing part B.

Candidates will complete a 10 week (minimum) period of industrial experience with a consortium company, or with any other relevant (partner) company approved by the Programme Director, after Part B studies and before starting Part C. Students will then undertake a further period of industrial experience (usually with the same organisation) for Semester 1 of Part C.  During these periods students will be preparing for and undertaking their industry based individual project (WSD216) and personal and professional development (WSC507) modules. 

An alternative route is for candidates who cannot find an industrial placement at the end of Part B (for the industry based individual project and professional development modules) to continue their studies in Semester 1 of Part C at the University with the agreement of the Programme Director.  

Any candidate unable to meet the above requirements will be eligible to transfer to BEng Manufacturing Engineering at the appropriate programme part. 

 

4.1    Part A - Introductory Modules

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
MAA306 Mathematics for Manufacturing Engineering 20 1+2 C
MMA102 Engineering Science 1 20 1+2 C
MMA604 Materials & Manufacturing Processes 20 1+2 C
MMA400 Manufacturing Design 1 10 1 C
MMA505 Integrating Studies 1a for IME 10 1 C
MMB610 Manufacturing Technology 10 1 C
MMA210 Manufacturing Management 10 2 C
MMA506 Integrating Studies 1b for IME 10 2 C
MMA900 Electronics and Electrical Technology1 10 2 C

                   

  

4.2    Part B - Degree Modules

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
MMB501 Integrating Studies 20 1+2 C
MMB600 Manufacturing Process Technology 20 1+2 C
MMB112 Engineering Science 2 10 1 C
MMB310 Engineering and Management Modelling 10 1 C
MMB506 Insight into Industry 10 1 C
MMC200 Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality 10 1 C
MAB206 Statistics 10 2 C
MMB301 Software Engineering 10 2 C
MMB413 Machine Design 10 2 C
MMC203 Manufacturing Planning and Control 10 2 C

                     

4.3    Part C - Degree Modules

Some modules in Part C and D are paired together. For example, (1a) in part C is paired with (2a) in part D. Similarly (1d) in part D is paired with (2d) also in part D. All students MUST COMPLETE AT LEAST TWO of these specialist module pairs during part C or D.  The second module of a pair (numbered 2) may not be taken without the prerequisite module (numbered 1) but the preliminary modules may be studied independently.

For modules WSD216 and WSC507 students will be based at their placement company - Modules are by distance learning.  C* is the alternative route for students who are unable to secure an Industrial Placement for Part C (with the agreement of the Programme Director).

ONE optional module must be chosen from each group.

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSC507 Personal and Professional Development 20 1 C
WSD216 Industry Based Individual Project 40 1 C
WSC201 Organisation Structure & Strategy 10 1 C*
WSD218 University Based Individual Project 50 1 C*
WSC206 Product Innovation Management 10 2 C
WSC603 Metrology 10 2 C
WSD203 Lean Operations and Supply Chain Management 10 2 C
WSC204 Management of the Human Resource 10 2 OA
WSC300 Product Information Systems - CAD 10 2 OA
WSC106 Finite Element Analysis 10 2 OB (1a)
MPC012 Polymer Engineering: Processing and Manufacture 10 2 OB (1b)
WSC610 Healthcare Engineering 10 2 OC
WSC700 Sports Engineering 10 2 OC
LAN*** University Wide Language 10 2 OC

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

  

 4.4    Part D - Degree Modules           

A number of modules are paired together.  For example, the module marked (1a) in part C is paired with (2a) in part D. Similarly (1d) in part D is paired with (2d) also in part D. All students MUST COMPLETE AT LEAST TWO of these specialist module pairs during part C or D.  The second module of a pair (numbered 2) may not be taken without the prerequisite module (numbered 1) but the preliminary modules may be studied independently.

A total weight of 40 credits must be chosen from the optional modules across both semesters (10 credits from Semester 1 and 30 credits from Semester 2). 

 

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSD503 Project Engineering - Total Product Design 30 1+2 C
WSC401 Design Methods and Communication 10 1 C
WSC600 Advanced Manufacturing Processes and Technology 1 10 1 C (1d)
WSC602 Sustainable Manufacturing 10 1 C (1c)
WSD207 Project Management 10 1 C
WSD407 Sustainable Product Design 10 2 C (2c)
WSC201 Organisation Structure & Strategy 10 1 OA
WSC400 Design for Assembly 10 1 OA
WSC606 Additive Manufacturing for Product Development 10 1 OA (1e)
WSD100 Structural Integrity 10 1 OA (2a)
MPD014 Polymer Engineering - Principles and Design 10 1 OA (2b)
LAN*** University Wide Language 10 1 OA
WSD606 Additive Manufacturing and Reverse Engineering 10 2 OB (2e)
WSC204 Management of the Human Resource 10 2 OC
WSC300 Product Information Systems - Computer Aided Design 10 2 OC
WSD601 Advanced Manufacturing Processes and Technology 2 10 2 OC (2d)
WSC610 Healthcare Engineering 10 2 OD
WSC700 Sports Engineering 10 2 OD
LAN*** University Wide Language 10 2 OD

 

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

 

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 Criteria for Progression and Award of Degree

In order to progress from Part A to Part B, from Part B to Part C, and from Part C to Part D and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also: 

5.1.1 In order to progress from Part A to Part B, from Part B to Part C, from Part C to Part D candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also accumulate at least 120 credits from the Part and a minimum overall average of 55% for the Part.

5.1.2 In order to progress into Part B candidates must normally complete a four week (minimum) period of industrial experience with a partner or consortium company or other relevant organisation agreed by the Programme Director after Part A studies and before starting Part B.

5.1.3 Unless following the alternative route (with the agreement of the Programme Director), candidates must complete a ten week (minimum) period of industrial experience with a consortium or other relevant (partner) company after Part B studies and before starting Part C. Students will also undertake modules WSD216 and WSC507 in a consortium or other relevant (partner) organisation during Semester 1 of Part C.

5.2 Criteria for Candidates who do not receive Permission to Progress or gain the Award of a Degree

Any candidate who fails to achieve the criteria for progression from Part A to Part B, Part B to Part C or Part C to Part D shall have the opportunity to repeat module assessments in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XX. 

A candidate who has failed to progress from Part A to Part B or Part B to Part C may elect to enter the BEng Honours Degree programme in Manufacturing Engineering, provided that the candidate has achieved the criteria for progression on the BEng programme at the appropriate point.

A candidate who does not secure a placement with a partner or consortium company before the commencement of Part C will also be allowed to transfer to Part C of an alternative degree programme in the School subject to the approval of the relevant programme Director.

Candidates who do not progress from Part B cannot take up the industrial placement period with the partner or consortium company. 

 

 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX.  The overall average percentage marks for each part will be combined in the ratio (Part B 20: Part C 40: Part D 40) to determine the overall average percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).

Programme Specification

EL MEng (Hons) Electronic and Electrical Engineering (2018 Entry)

Academic Year: 2019/20

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)

Final award MEng / MEng+DIS / MEng+DPS/ MEng+DIntS
Programme title Electronic and Electrical Engineering
Programme code WSUM10
Length of programme The duration of the programme is 8 semesters or 10 semesters if taken with the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS). The programme is only available on a full-time basis.
UCAS code H601, H605
Admissions criteria

MEng - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/h601

MEng+DIS /DPS /DIntS - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/h605

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The MEng in Electronic and Electrical Engineering aims to: 

  • A1.   Produce high quality graduates capable of shaping the future of Electronic and Electrical Engineering by becoming leaders in their chosen career, whether in industry or academia
  • A2.   Provide high-quality teaching and practical experience across a complete range of core subjects in order to give students the skills to investigate new and emerging electronic and electrical engineering problems
  • A3.   Develop engineers capable of designing innovative systems and managing the development process in order to deliver solutions that meet the requirements of customers
  • A4.   Produce engineers with extensive knowledge and understanding of engineering management and business practices and of relevant ethical, business, sustainability and legal constraints
  • A5.   Develop graduates capable of integrating their knowledge of mathematics, science and the broader engineering context to solve complex problems.
  • A6.   Promote innovation in engineering by applying appropriate knowledge, skills, tools and techniques in in delivering successful solutions to both familiar and unfamiliar technical problems
  • A7.   Support personal and professional development, including, problem solving, leadership, team work and both oral and written presentation skills, as well as the ability to take the initiative in improving personal performance

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: Engineering Technician, Incorporated Engineer and Chartered Engineer Standard, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2013.
  • UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2014.
  • Guidance Note on Academic Accreditation, Engineering Council UK, July 2014.
  • The UK Quality Code for Higher Education, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, April 2012.
  • Subject Benchmark Statement: Engineering, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, November 2010.
  • Master's Degree Characteristics, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, March 2010.

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to: 

  • K1.   Demonstrate a comprehensive understanding of scientific, mathematical and engineering principles appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering
  • K2.   Demonstrate an understanding of general engineering and broader principles relevant to engineering
  • K3.   Understand the commercial, economic and sustainable aspects in the application of engineering processes
  • K4.   Demonstrate awareness of the relevant codes of practice and regulatory frameworks and the operational practices for safe operation of engineering processes
  • K5.   Demonstrate extensive knowledge of the application of management and business practices appropriate to engineering industries, including their limitations
  • K6.   Recognise the professional and ethical responsibilities of engineers
  • K7.   Demonstrate awareness of developing technologies in electronic and electrical engineering
  • K8.   Draw on a deep understanding of electronic and electrical engineering to form original solutions to engineering problems, some of which may have incomplete specifications

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to: 

  • C1.   Apply engineering principles to the analysis of electronic and electrical engineering problems;
  • C2.   Apply mathematical and computer-based methods for modelling and analysing a range of practical and hypothetical engineering processes, components and products;
  • C3.   Generate innovative designs for engineering problems within the framework of economic, social, ethical and environmental issues;
  • C4.   Evaluate and respond to customer needs, including fitness for purpose and cost;
  • C5.   Follow essential design principles appropriate to relevant components, equipment and associated software.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to: 

  • P1.   Demonstrate a comprehensive understanding of design, modelling, simulation and analytical methods and tools appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering
  • P2.   Demonstrate a thorough understanding of current practice in defining and solving practical engineering problems, including its limitations and likely future direction
  • P3.   Demonstrate an ability to manage the design process
  • P4.   Use conventional laboratory equipment and relevant test and measurement equipment in an appropriate and safe manner
  • P5.   Apply engineering techniques taking into account relevant codes of practice, commercial constraints and industry standards
  • P6.   Demonstrate awareness of contractual issues and intellectual property rights
  • P7.   Work with technical uncertainty
  • P8.   Use appropriate management tools for project work.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to: 

  • T1.   Search and retrieve information, ideas and data from a variety of sources
  • T2.   Select and analyse appropriate evidence and data to solve problems;
  • T3.   Apply skills in problem solving, communication, team working and in the use of general software tools;
  • T4.   Develop a personal work plan and take responsibility for its execution, independently, as team member or as a team leader;
  • T5.   Produce appropriate technical reports, papers, diagrams and drawings;
  • T6.   Plan self-learning and be able to take the initiative in improving personal performance, as the foundation for lifelong learning

4. Programme structure

4.1 Part A 

Code

Title

Weight

Semester

C/O 

WSA015

Industrial Project in Electronic and Electrical Engineering

20

1+2

C

WSA011

Electronic Circuits

20

1

C

WSA010

Programming and Software Design

20

1

C

MAA103

Core Mathematics 1

10

1

C

WSA012

Electrical Science A

20

2

C

WSA013

Digital Systems

20

2

C

MAA203

Core Mathematics 2

10

2

C

 

4.2 Part B 

Code

Title

Weight

Semester

C/O 

WSB013

Robotics Project Design and Management

20

1+2

C

WSB003

Electrical Science B

20

1

C

WSB010

Electronics

20

1

C

MAB103

Advanced Mathematics 1

10

1

C

WSB002

Communications

20

2

C

WSB004

Control System Design

20

2

C

MAB203

Advanced Mathematics 2

20

2

C

 

4.3 Part I 

Code Title
WSI010 Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (Non-credit bearing)
WSI020 Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (Non-credit bearing)
WSI035 Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) (Non-credit bearing)

 

For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DIntS), Part I will be between Parts B and C or between Parts C and D and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.

 

4.4 Part C 

Students must choose two options ‘o’ from each semester 

Code

Title

Weight

Semester

C/O 

WSD001

Team Project

30

1+2

C

WSC200

Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality

10

1

C

WSC002

Digital Communications Theory and Practice

20

1

O

WSC003

Sustainable & Renewable Energy Systems

20

1

O

WSC018

Embedded Systems Design and Implementation

20

1

O

WSC039

Microwave Communications

20

1

O

WSC041

Digital and State Space Control

20

1

O

WSC004

Computer Networks

20

2

O

WSC014

Bioelectricity and Biophotonics Engineering

20

2

O

WSC022

Power Electronics

20

2

O

WSC054

Electronic Systems Design with FPGAs

20

2

O

WSC055

Digital Interfacing and Instrumentation

20

2

O

 

4.5 Part D 

Students must choose optional modules totalling 60 credits. 

Code

Title

Weight

Semester

C/O 

WSD030

Advanced Project

50

50

c

WSD034

Applying Management Theory

10

10

c

WSD506

Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing

15

15

oA

WSD509

Communication Networks

15

15

oA

WSD510

Personal Radio Communications

15

15

oA

WSD511

Information Theory and Coding

15

15

oA

WSD515

Communication Channels

15

15

oA

WSD521

Advanced FPGA Design

15

15

oA

WSD531

Sustainability and Energy Systems

15

15

oA

WSD533

Solar Power

15

15

oA

WSD534

Wind Power 1

15

15

oA

WSD535

Water Power

15

15

oA

WSD536

Biomass 1

15

15

oA

WSD568

Sensors and Actuators for Control

15

15

oA

WSD508

Digital Signal Processing for Software Defined Radio

15

15

oA

WSD516

Communications Network Security

15

15

oA

WSD517

Mobile Network Technologies

15

15

oA

WSD523

Antennas 

15

15

oA

WSD526

Radio Frequency and Microwave Integrated Circuit Design

15

15

oA

WSD532

Integration of Renewables

15

15

oA

WSD538

Energy Storage

10

10

oA

WSD539

Solar Thermal Systems

10

10

oA

WSD540

Advanced Photovoltaics

10

10

oA

WSD032

Microwave Circuits Laboratory

15

15

oB

XXXXXX

Options from the University Catalogue

30

30

oC

 

The optional modules listed oA are block taught in one week or two week long blocks, while those listed oB run over both semesters. 

The option oC allows a free choice of modules worth 30 credits from the University Catalogue. This choice should be restricted to modules from Part C or D level, subject to the overall requirement for the Part that at least 90 credits should be from Part D level or above. The total of 120 credits should be arranged as near to 60 credits per semester as possible. 

 

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 Criteria for programme progression 

Progression from Part A to Part B, from Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D will be subject to the provisions set out in Regulation XX and in addition candidates must accumulate 120 credits and achieve an overall average of 55% in each part. 

At the end of Parts A, B, or C candidates not meeting the progression requirements for the MEng after reassessment, or at the option of the candidate, may transfer to the BEng degree programme providing they meet the minimum requirements set out in Regulation XX. 

In the event of a candidate transferring onto the BEng programme following assessment (or reassessment) at the end of Part C the degree mark will be calculated by combining average marks in the ratio Part B:40 and Part C:60.  The degree award in this case will be governed by the provisions set out in Regulation XX. 

5.2 Degree Award 

To qualify for the award of the degree of Master of Engineering, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part D, with no module marks less than 30%, in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XX.  

In addition, candidates must achieve a minimum mark of 50% in all modules with the prefix WSD5xx in order to accumulate credit. 

Should a candidate fail to qualify for the MEng award at the end of part D following reassessment (or at the option of the candidate) the BEng degree will be awarded on the basis of performance at Parts B and C. The degree mark will be calculated by combining average marks in the ratio Part B:40 and Part C:60

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

A candidate's final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments at Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 20: Part C 40: Part D 40 to determine the final Programme Mark.

Programme Specification

EL MEng (Hons) Systems Engineering (2018 Entry)

Academic Year: 2019/20

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)

Final award MEng / MEng+DIS / MEng+DPS/ MEng+DIntS
Programme title Systems Engineering
Programme code WSUM20
Length of programme The duration of the programme is 8 semesters or 10 semesters if taken with the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS). The programme is only available on a full-time basis.
UCAS code H660, H641
Admissions criteria

MEng - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/h660

MEng+DIS/ DPS/ DIntS - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/h641

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The MEng in Systems Engineering aims to 

  • A1.   Produce high quality graduates to shape the future of Systems Engineering by becoming leaders in industry or engaging in world leading academic research.
  • A2.   Provide a high-quality learning experience across a complete range of core subjects in order to give students the skills to investigate new and emerging systems engineering problems
  • A3.   Develop engineers capable of designing innovative systems and managing the development process in order to deliver solutions that meet the requirements of customers
  • A4.   Produce engineers with extensive knowledge and understanding of engineering management and business practices and of relevant ethical, business, sustainability and legal constraints
  • A5.   Develop graduates capable of integrating their knowledge of mathematics, science and the broader engineering context to solve complex problems.
  • A6.   Promote innovation in engineering by applying appropriate knowledge, skills, tools and techniques in delivering successful solutions to both familiar and unfamiliar technical problems
  • A7.   Support personal and professional development, including, problem solving, leadership, team work and both oral and written presentation skills, as well as the ability to take the initiative in improving personal performance

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: Engineering Technician, Incorporated Engineer and Chartered Engineer Standard, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2013.
  • UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2014.
  • Guidance Note on Academic Accreditation, Engineering Council UK, July 2014.
  • The UK Quality Code for Higher Education, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, April 2012.
  • Subject Benchmark Statement: Engineering, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, November 2010.
  • Master's Degree Characteristics, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, March 2010.

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to: 

  • K1.   Demonstrate a comprehensive understanding of scientific, mathematical and engineering principles appropriate to systems engineering
  • K2.   Demonstrate an understanding of general engineering and broader principles relevant to engineering
  • K3.   Understand the commercial, economic and sustainable aspects in the application of engineering processes
  • K4.   Demonstrate awareness of the relevant codes of practice and regulatory frameworks and the operational practices for safe operation of engineering processes
  • K5.   Demonstrate extensive knowledge of the application of management and business practices appropriate to engineering industries, including their limitations
  • K6.   Recognise the professional and ethical responsibilities of engineers
  • K7.   Develop awareness of developing technologies in systems engineering
  • K8.   Draw on a deep understanding of systems to form original solutions to engineering problems, some of which may have incomplete specifications

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to: 

  • C1.   Apply engineering principles to the analysis of systems engineering problems;
  • C2.   Apply mathematical and computer-based methods for modelling and analysing a range of practical and hypothetical engineering processes, components and products;
  • C3.   Generate innovative designs for engineering problems within the framework of economic, social, ethical and environmental issues;
  • C4.   Evaluate and respond to customer needs, including fitness for purpose and cost;
  • C5.   Follow essential design principles appropriate to relevant components, equipment and associated software.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to: 

  • P1.   Demonstrate a comprehensive understanding of design, modelling, simulation and analytical methods and tools appropriate to systems engineering
  • P2.   Demonstrate a thorough understanding of current practice in defining and solving practical engineering problems, including its limitations and likely future direction
  • P3.   Demonstrate an ability to manage the design process
  • P4.   Use conventional laboratory equipment and relevant test and measurement equipment in an appropriate and safe manner
  • P5.   Apply engineering techniques taking into account relevant codes of practice, commercial constraints and industry standards
  • P6.   Demonstrate awareness of contractual issues and intellectual property rights
  • P7.   Work with technical uncertainty
  • P8.   Use appropriate management tools for project work.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to: 

  • T1.   Search and retrieve information, ideas and data from a variety of sources
  • T2.   Select and analyse appropriate evidence and data to solve problems;
  • T3.   Apply skills in problem solving, communication, team working and in the use of general software tools;
  • T4.   Develop a personal work plan and take responsibility for its execution, independently, as team member or as a team leader;
  • T5.   Produce appropriate technical reports, papers, diagrams and drawings;
  • T6.   Plan self-learning and be able to take the initiative in improving personal performance, as the foundation for lifelong learning

4. Programme structure

4.1 Part A 

Code

Title

Weight

Semester

C/O 

WSA016

Industrial Project in Systems Engineering

20

1+2

C

WSA011

Electronic Circuits

20

1

C

WSA010

Programming and Software Design

20

1

C

MAA103

Core Mathematics 1

10

1

C

WSA012

Electrical Science A

20

2

C

WSA013

Digital Systems

20

2

C

MAA203

Core Mathematics 2

10

2

C

 

4.2 Part B 

Candidates must choose one option ‘o’ from semester 1 

Code

Title

Weight

Semester

C/O 

WSB006

Systems Integration

20

1+2

C

WSB007

Systems Methods

20

1

C

MAB103

Advanced Mathematics 1

10

1

C

WSB004 Control System Design 20 2 C
WSB009 Mobile Robots 20 2 C

MAB203

Advanced Mathematics 2

10

2

C

WSB010

Electronics

20

1

O

WSB014

Embedded Systems Programming

20

1

O

WSB140

Mechanics for Robotics

20

1

O

 

4.3 Part I

Code Title
WSI010 Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (Non-credit bearing)
WSI020 Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (Non-credit bearing)
WSI035 Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) (Non-credit bearing)

For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DIntS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C or between Parts C and D and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.

 

 

4.4 Part C 

Candidates must choose one option ‘o’ from each semester 

Code

Title

Weight

Semester

C/O 

WSD001

Team Project

30

1+2

C

WSC200

Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality

10

1

C

DSC502

Human Factors in Systems Engineering C

10

1

C

WSC012

Systems Engineering Applications

10

1

C

WSC013

Systems Architecture, Simulation and Modelling

20

2

C

WSC041

Digital and State Space Control

20

1

O

WSC018

Embedded Systems Design and Implementation

20

1

O

WSC002

Digital Communications Theory and Practice

20

1

O

WSC003

Sustainable & Renewable Energy Systems

20

1

O

WSC004

Computer Networks

20

2

O

WSC014

Bioelectricity and Biophotonics Engineering

20

2

O

WSC054

Electronic Systems Design with FPGAs

20

2

O

WSC055

Digital Interfacing and Instrumentation

20

2

O

 

4.5 Part D 

Candidates must choose exactly 45 credits of option modules, a minimum of 15 credits of which must be from those labelled OA. The remaining credit can be from options labelled oA, oB or oC. 

Code

Title

Weight

Semester

C/O 

WSD030

Advanced Project

50

1+2

C

WSD033

Systems Diagnostics

10

1+2

C

WSD062

Understanding Complexity

15

2

C

WSD572

Systems Architecture

15

1

OA

WSD060

Engineering and Managing Capability

15

2

OA

WSD566

Systems Design

15

1

OA

WSD567

Validation and Verification

15

2

OA

WSD571

Holistic Engineering

15

2

OA

WSD536

Biomass 1

15

1

OB

WSD506

Digital Signal Processing

15

1

OB

WSD569

Innovation and Entrepreneurship in Engineering

15

1

OB

WSD533

Solar Power

15

1

OB

WSD535

Water Power

15

1

OB

WSD534

Wind Power 1

15

1

OB

WSD532

Integration of Renewables

15

2

OB

WSD517

Mobile Network Technologies

15

2

OB

XXXXXX

Options from the University Catalogue

30

1+2

OC

 

The optional modules listed oA and oB are block taught in one week or two week long blocks.

 

The option oC allows a free choice of modules worth 30 credits from the University Catalogue. This choice should be restricted to modules from Part C or D level, subject to the overall requirement for the Part that at least 90 credits should be from Part D level or above. The total of 120 credits should be arranged as near to 60 credits per semester as possible.

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

  

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 Criteria for programme progression 

Progression from Part A to Part B, from Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D will be subject to the provisions set out in Regulation XX and in addition candidates must accumulate 120 credits and achieve an overall average of 55% in each part. 

At the end of Parts A, B, or C candidates not meeting the progression requirements for the MEng after reassessment, or at the option of the candidate, may transfer to the BEng degree programme providing they meet the minimum requirements set out in Regulation XX. 

In the event of a candidate transferring onto the BEng programme following assessment (or reassessment) at the end of Part C the degree mark will be calculated by combining average marks in the ratio Part B:40 and Part C:60.  The degree award in this case will be governed by the provisions set out in Regulation XX. 

5.2 Degree Award 

To qualify for the award of the degree of Master of Engineering, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part D, with no module marks less than 30%, in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XX.  

In addition, candidates must achieve a minimum mark of 50% in all modules with the prefix WSD5xx in order to accumulate credit. 

Should a candidate fail to qualify for the MEng award at the end of part D following reassessment (or at the option of the candidate) the BEng degree will be awarded on the basis of performance at Parts B and C. The degree mark will be calculated by combining average marks in the ratio Part B:40 and Part C:60

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

A candidate's final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments at Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 20: Part C 40: Part D 40 to determine the final Programme Mark.

Programme Specification

EL MEng (Hons) Electronic and Computer Systems Engineering (2018 Entry)

Academic Year: 2019/20

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)
Institute of Measurement and Control (InstMC)

 

Final award MEng/ MEng + DIS/ MEng + DPS/ MEng + DPS/ MEng + DIntS
Programme title Electronic and Computer Systems Engineering
Programme code WSUM30
Length of programme The duration of the programme is 8 semesters or 10 semesters if taken with either the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS). The programme is only available on a full-time basis.
UCAS code H612, H613
Admissions criteria

http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/electronic-computer-systems-engineering/

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

To meet the aims of the MEng programme in Electronic and Computer Systems Engineering and to further enhance a student’s learning experience by providing a high quality educational experience, for well motivated high achievers, that:

  • A1.   increases the depth and breadth of technical study to the level expected of Masters level graduates;
  • A2.   develops knowledge and skills, to a depth and breadth expected of Masters level graduates, as a preparation for a career in the electronic and electrical engineering industry;
  • A3.   develops an enhanced capacity for independent learning, planning and self–reliance;
  • A4.   enhances teamwork and leadership skills, equipping graduates of the programme to play leading roles in industry and potentially take responsibility for future innovation and change

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: Engineering Technician, Incorporated Engineer and Chartered Engineer Standard, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2013.

UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2014.

Guidance Note on Academic Accreditation, Engineering Council UK, July 2014.

The UK Quality Code for Higher Education, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, April 2012.

Subject Benchmark Statement: Engineering: The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, November 2010.

Master's Degree Characteristics, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, March 2010.

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate a knowledge and understanding of:

  • K1.   mathematical methods appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines, including their limitations and range of applicability
  • K2.   principles of engineering appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines, including their range of applicability;
  • K3.   principles of Information Technology and Communications appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines;
  • K4.   design principles and techniques appropriate to relevant components, equipment and associated software;
  • K5.   characteristics of relevant engineering components;
  • K6.   management and business practices appropriate to engineering industries, their application and limitations;
  • K7.   codes of practice and regulatory frameworks relevant to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines;
  • K8.   operational practices and requirements for safe operation relevant to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines;
  • K9.   the professional and ethical responsibilities of engineers;
  • K10.  team roles, team-working skills and leadership skills;
  • K11.  relevant research methods.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate:

  • C1.   an understanding of standard mathematical and computer based methods for modelling and analysing a range of practical and hypothetical engineering problems, and the essential principles of modelling and analysing routine engineering systems, processes, components and products;
  • C2.   an ability to develop innovative solutions to practical engineering problems;
  • C3.   a competence in defining and solving practical engineering problems;
  • C4.   the ability to apply engineering processes in a range practical contexts.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • P1.   use appropriate or novel mathematical methods for modelling and analysing pertinent engineering problems;
  • P2.   select and use relevant test and measurement equipment;
  • P3.   plan and execute safely novel or unfamiliar experimental laboratory work;
  • P4.   select and use computational tools and packages (including programming languages where appropriate);
  • P5.   design, and where appropriate construct, new systems, components or processes;
  • P6.   undertake testing of design ideas in the laboratory or by simulation, and analyse and critically evaluate the results;
  • P7.   search for, retrieve and evaluate information, ideas and data from a variety of sources;
  • P8.   manage a project and produce technical reports, papers, diagrams and drawings at an appropriate level.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • T1.   manipulate, sort and present data in a range of forms;
  • T2.   use evidence based methods in the solution of complex problems;
  • T3.   work with limited, incomplete and/or contradictory information in the solution of unfamiliar problems;
  • T4.   use an engineering and/or systems approach to the solution of problems in unfamiliar situations;
  • T5.   be creative and innovative in problem solving;
  • T6.   work effectively as part of a team and show potential for leadership;
  • T7.   use a wide range of information and communications technology;
  • T8.   manage time and resources;
  • T9.   use appropriate management tools;
  • T10.  communicate effectively orally, visually and in writing at an appropriate level;
  • T11.  learn effectively, continuously and independently in a variety of environments.

4. Programme structure

4.1       Part A - Introductory Modules

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSA017 Industrial Project in Electronic and Computer Systems Engineering 20 1+2 C
MAA103 Core Mathematics 1 10 1 C
WSA010 Programming and Software Design 20 1 C
WSA011 Electronic Circuits 20 1 C
MAA203 Core Mathematics 2 10 2 C
WSA012 Electrical Science B 20 2 C
WSA013 Digital Systems 20 2 C

 

4.2       Part B - Degree Modules

Candidates must choose ONE option from Semester Two.

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSB013 Robotics Project Design and Management 20 1+2 C
MAB103 Advanced Mathematics 1 10 1 C
WSB010 Electronics 20 1 C
WSB014 Embedded Systems Programming 20 1 C
MAB203 Advanced Mathematics 2 10 2 C
WSB019 Computer Architecture 20 2 C
WSB002 Communications 20 2 C
WSB004 Control Systems Design 20 2 C

 

4.3       Part I

Code Title
WSI010 Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (Non-credit bearing)
WSI020 Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (Non-credit bearing)
WSI035 Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) (Non-credit bearing)

For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DIntS), Part I will be between Part B and C or Parts C and D and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.

 

 

 

4.4       Part C - Degree Modules

Candidates must choose ONE option from Semester One.

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSD001 Team Project 30 1+2 C
WSC018 Embedded Systems Design and Implementation 20 1 C
WSC200 Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality 10 1 C
WSC054 Electronic Systems Design with FPGAs 20 2 C
WSC055 Digital Interfacing and Instrumentation 20 2 C
WSC002 Principles of Digital Communications 20 1 O
WSC003 Sustainable & Renewable Energy Systems 20 1 O
WSC039 Microwave Communications 20 1 O
WSC041 Digital and State Space Control 20 1 O

 

  

4.5       Part D - Degree Modules


Candidates must choose optional modules totalling 20 credits.

 

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSD030 Advanced Project 50 1+2 C
WSD034 Applying Management Theory 10 1+2 C
WSD530 Programming Multi/many-core Systems 15 1 C
WSD525 Advanced Electrical Engineering Applications 15 2 C
WSD506 Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing 15 1 OA
WSD509 Communication Networks 15 1 OA
WSD510 Personal Radio Communications 15 1 OA
WSD511 Information Theory and Coding 15 1 OA
WSD515 Communication Channels 15 1 OA
WSD568 Sensors and Actuators for Control 15 1 OA
WSD508 Digital Signal Processing for Software Defined Radio 15 2 OA
WSD516 Telecommunication Network Security 15 2 OA
WSD517 Mobile Network Technologies 15 2 OA
WSD032 Microwave Circuits Laboratory 15 1+2 OB
XXXXXX Options from the University Catalogue 30 1+2 OC

 

The optional modules listed oA are block taught in one week or two week long blocks, while those listed oB run over both semesters.

 

The option oC allows a free choice of modules worth 30 credits from the University Catalogue. This choice should be restricted to modules from Part C or D level, subject to the overall requirement for the Part that at least 90 credits should be from Part D level or above. The total of 120 credits should be arranged as near to 60 credits per semester as possible.

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

 

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 Criteria for programme progression

Progression from Part A to Part B, from part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D will be subject to the provisions set out in Regulation XX and in addition candidates must accumulate 120 credits and achieve an overall average of 55% in each part.

At the end of Parts A, B, or C candidates not meeting the progression requirements for the MEng after reassessment, or at the option of the candidate, may transfer to the BEng degree programme providing they meet the minimum requirements set out in Regulation XX.

In the event of a candidate transferring onto the BEng programme following assessment (or reassessment) at the end of Part C the degree mark will be calculated by combining average marks in the ratio Part B:40 and Part C:60.  The degree award in this case will be governed by the provisions set out in Regulation XX.

 

5.2  Degree award

To qualify for the award of the Degree of Master of Engineering, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part D, with no module mark less than 30%, in accordance with the provision of Regulation XX. 

In addition, candidates should normally obtain a mark of at least 50% in all modules with the prefix WSD5xx in order to accumulate credit.

Should a candidate fail to qualify for the MEng award at the end of Part D following reassessment (or at the option of the candidate) the BEng degree will be awarded on the basis of performance at Parts B and C.  The degree mark will be calculated by combining average marks in the ratio Part B:40 and Part C:60.

 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

A candidate's final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments at Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX.  The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 20: Part C 40: Part D 40, to determine the final Programme Mark.

Programme Specification

EL MEng (Hons) Robotics, Mechatronics and Control Engineering (2019 Entry)

Academic Year: 2019/20

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)

Final award MEng/MEng + DPS/MEng + DInts/MEng +DIS
Programme title Robotics, Mechatronics and Control Engineering
Programme code WSUM35
Length of programme The duration of the programme is 8 semesters or 10 semesters if taken with the Diploma in Industrial Studies, Diploma of Professional Studies of Diploma of International Studies. The programme is only available on a full-time basis.
UCAS code H673, H674
Admissions criteria

MEng - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/h673

MEng + DPS/DInts - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/h674

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The MEng in Robotics, Mechatronics and Control Engineering aims to: 

  • A1.   Prepare highly skilled graduates to pursue careers in Robotics, Mechatronics and Control Engineering  across a range of industries and activities involving the design, development and analysis of complex systems
  • A2.   Provide a high-quality learning experience across a complete range of core subjects in order to give students the skills to investigate robotics, mechatronics and control engineering problems.
  • A3.   Develop engineers capable of designing innovative systems and managing the development process in order to deliver solutions that meet the requirements of customers.
  • A4.   Produce engineers with extensive knowledge and understanding of engineering management and business practices and of the relevant ethical, business, sustainability and legal constraints.
  • A5.   Develop graduates capable of integrating their knowledge of mathematics, science and the broader engineering context to solve complex problems.
  • A6.   Promote innovation in engineering practice by applying appropriate knowledge, skills, tools and techniques in the analysis, diagnosis and solution of industry-related problems.
  • A7.   Support personal and professional development, including, problem solving, leadership, team work and both oral and written presentation skills, as well as the ability to take the initiative in improving personal performance.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: Engineering Technician, Incorporated Engineer and Chartered Engineer Standard, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2013.
  • UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2014.
  • Guidance Note on Academic Accreditation, Engineering Council UK, July 2014.
  • The UK Quality Code for Higher Education, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, April 2012.
  • Subject Benchmark Statement: Engineering, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, November 2010.
  • Master's Degree Characteristics, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, March 2010.

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to: 

  • K1.   Demonstrate a comprehensive understanding of scientific, mathematical and engineering principles appropriate to robotics, mechatronics and control engineering
  • K2.   Demonstrate an understanding of general engineering and broader principles relevant to engineering
  • K3.   Understand the commercial, economic and sustainable aspects in the application of engineering processes
  • K4.   Demonstrate awareness of the relevant codes of practice and regulatory frameworks and the operational practices for safe operation of engineering processes
  • K5.   Demonstrate extensive knowledge of the application of management and business practices appropriate to engineering industries, including their limitations
  • K6.   Recognise the professional and ethical responsibilities of engineers
  • K7.   Demonstrate awareness of developing technologies in  robotics, mechatronics and control engineering
  • K8.   Draw on a deep understanding of robotics, mechatronics and control to form original solutions to engineering problems, some of which may have incomplete specifications.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to: 

  • C1.   Apply engineering principles to the analysis of robotics, mechatronics and control engineering  problems;
  • C2.   Apply mathematical and computer-based methods for modelling and analysing a range of practical and hypothetical engineering processes, components and products;
  • C3.   Generate innovative designs for engineering problems within the framework of economic, social, ethical and environmental issues;
  • C4.   Evaluate and respond to customer needs, including fitness for purpose and cost;
  • C5.   Follow essential design principles appropriate to relevant components, equipment and associated software.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to: 

  • P1.   Demonstrate a comprehensive understanding of design, modelling, simulation and analytical methods and tools appropriate to robotics, mechatronics and control engineering
  • P2.   Demonstrate a thorough understanding of current practice in defining and solving practical engineering problems, including its limitations and likely future direction
  • P3.   Demonstrate an ability to manage the design process
  • P4.   Use conventional laboratory equipment and relevant test and measurement equipment in an appropriate and safe manner
  • P5.   Apply engineering techniques taking into account relevant codes of practice, commercial constraints and industry standards
  • P6.   Demonstrate awareness of contractual issues and intellectual property rights
  • P7.   Work with technical uncertainty
  • P8.   Use appropriate management tools for project work.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to: 

  • T1.   Search and retrieve information, ideas and data from a variety of sources
  • T2.   Select and analyse appropriate evidence and data to solve problems;
  • T3.   Apply skills in problem solving, communication, team working and in the use of general software tools;
  • T4.   Develop a personal work plan and take responsibility for its execution, independently, as team member or as a team leader;
  • T5.   Produce appropriate technical reports, papers, diagrams and drawings;
  • T6.   Plan self-learning and be able to take the initiative in improving personal performance, as the foundation for lifelong learning

4. Programme structure

 

4.1 Part A 

Code

Title

Semester

Modular Weight

C/O 

WSA018

Industrial Project in Robotics, Mechatronics and Control Engineering

1 + 2

20

C

MAA103

Core Mathematics 1

1

10

C

WSA010

Programming and Software Design

1

20

C

WSA011

Electronic Circuits

1

20

C

MAA203

Core Mathematics 2

2

10

C

WSA012

Electrical Science A

2

20

C

WSA013

Digital Systems

2

20

C

 

4.2 Part B 

Code

Title

Semester

Modular Weight

 C/O

WSB013

Robotics Project Design and Management

1 + 2

20

C

MAB103

Advanced Mathematics 1

1

10

C

WSB010

Electronics

1

20

C

WSB140

Mechanics for Robotics

1

20

C

WSB004

Control System Design

2

20

C

WSB009

Mobile Robots

2

20

C

MAB203

Advanced Mathematics 2

2

10

C

 

4.3 Part I

Code

Title

WSI010 Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (Non-credit bearing)
WSI020 Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (Non-credit bearing)
WSI035 Diploma in International Studies (DInts) (Non-credit bearing)

For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS), or the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS), Part I will be between Parts B and C or between Parts C and D and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.

 

4.4 Part C 

Candidates must choose one option ‘o’ from Semester 2 

Code

Title

Semester

Modular Weight

C/O 

WSD001

Team Project

1 + 2

30

C

WSC012

Systems Engineering Applications

1

10

C

WSC041

Digital and State Space Control

1

20

C

WSC108

Manufacturing Automation and Control

1

10

C

WSC200

Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality

1

10

C

WSC055

Digital Interfacing and Instrumentation

2

20

C

WSC004

Computer Networks

2

20

O

WSC014

Bioelectricity and Biophotonics Engineering

2

20

O

WSC022

Power Electronics

2

20

O

WSC054

Electronic Systems Design with FPGAs

2

20

O

 

4.5 Part D 

Candidates must choose optional modules totalling 30 credits 

Code

Title

Semester

Modular Weight

 C/O

WSD030

Advanced Project

1 + 2

50

C

WSD034

Applying Management Theory

1 + 2

10

C

WSD568

Sensors and Actuators for Control

1

15

C

WSD527

Systems Modelling for Control Engineering

1

15

C

WSD516

Communication Network Security

2

15

OA

WSD532

Integration of Renewables

2

15

OA

WSD062

Understanding Complexity

2

15

OA

WSD517

Mobile Network Technologies

2

15

OA

XXXXXX

Options from the University Catalogue

1 + 2

30

OB

The optional modules listed oA are block taught in one week or two week long blocks, while those listed oB run over both semesters.

 

The option oB allows a free choice of modules worth 30 credits from the University Catalogue. This choice should be restricted to modules from Part C or D level, subject to the overall requirement for the Part that at least 90 credits should be from Part D level or above. The total of 120 credits should be arranged as near to 60 credits per semester as possible.

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 Criteria for programme progression

Progression from Part A to Part B, from Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D will be subject to the provisions set out in Regulation XX and in addition candidates must accumulate 120 credits and achieve an overall average of 55% in each part. 

At the end of Parts A, B, or C candidates not meeting the progression requirements for the MEng after reassessment, or at the option of the candidate, may transfer to the BEng degree programme providing they meet the minimum requirements set out in Regulation XX. 

In the event of a candidate transferring onto the BEng programme following assessment (or reassessment) at the end of Part C the degree mark will be calculated by combining average marks in the ratio Part B:40 and Part C:60.  The degree award in this case will be governed by the provisions set out in Regulation XX.

5.2 Degree Award 

To qualify for the award of the degree of Master of Engineering, candidates must accumulate 120 credits from Part D, with no module marks less than 40%, in addition to the provisions of Regulation XX.  

In addition, candidates must achieve a minimum mark of 50% in all modules with the prefix WSD5xx in order to accumulate credit. 

Should a candidate fail to qualify for the MEng award at the end of part D following reassessment (or at the option of the candidate) the BEng degree will be awarded on the basis of performance at Parts B and C. The degree mark will be calculated by combining average marks in the ratio Part B:40 and Part C:60

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

A candidate's final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments at Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 20: Part C 40: Part D 40 to determine the final Programme Mark.

Programme Specification

EL MEng (Hons) Electronic and Electrical Engineering (Students undertaking Part C in 2019)

Academic Year: 2019/20

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)
Institute of Measurement and Control (InstMC)
Energy Institute (EI)

See also further details in 'Programme Structure' below.

 

Final award MEng/ MEng+DIS / MEng+DPS/ MEng+DIntS
Programme title Electronic and Electrical Engineering
Programme code WSUM10
Length of programme The duration of the programme is 8 semesters or 10 semesters if taken with either the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS). The programme is only available on a full-time basis.
UCAS code H601, H605
Admissions criteria

http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/electronic-electrical-engineering/

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

To meet the aims of the BEng programme in Electronic and Electrical Engineering and to further enhance a student’s learning experience by providing a high quality educational experience, for well motivated high achievers, that:

  • A1.   increases the depth and breadth of technical study to the level expected of Masters level graduates;
  • A2.   develops knowledge and skills, to a depth and breadth expected of Masters level graduates, as a preparation for a career in the electronic and electrical engineering industry;
  • A3.   develops an enhanced capacity for independent learning, planning and self–reliance;
  • A4.   enhances teamwork and leadership skills, equipping graduates of the programme to play leading roles in industry and potentially take responsibility for future innovation and change.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence; Engineering Technician, Incorporated Engineer and Chartered Engineer Standard, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2013.

UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence; The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2014.

Guidance Note on Academic Accreditation, Engineering Council UK, 2014.

The UK Quality Code for Higher Education. The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, April 2012.

Subject Benchmark Statement: Engineering, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, November 2010.

 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate a knowledge and understanding of:

  • K1.   mathematical methods appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines, including their limitations and range of applicability
  • K2.   principles of engineering and/or systems science appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines, including their range of applicability;
  • K3.   principles of Information Technology and Communications appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines;
  • K4.   design principles and techniques appropriate to relevant components, equipment and associated software;
  • K5.   characteristics of relevant engineering materials and components;
  • K6.   management and business practices appropriate to engineering industries, their application and limitations;
  • K7.   codes of practice and regulatory frameworks relevant to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines;
  • K8.   operational practices and requirements for safe operation relevant to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines;
  • K9.   the professional and ethical responsibilities of engineers;
  • K10.  team roles, team-working skills and leadership skills;
  • K11.  relevant research methods.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate:

  • C1.   an understanding of standard mathematical and/or computer based methods for modelling and analysing a range of practical and hypothetical engineering problems, and the essential principles of modelling and analysing routine engineering systems, processes, components and products;
  • C2.   an ability to develop innovative solutions to practical engineering problems;
  • C3.   a competence in defining and solving practical engineering problems;
  • C4.   the ability to apply systems processes in a range of different engineering contexts.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • P1.   use appropriate or novel mathematical methods for modelling and analysing pertinent engineering problems;
  • P2.   select and use relevant test and measurement equipment;
  • P3.   plan and execute safely novel or unfamiliar experimental laboratory work;
  • P4.   select and use computational tools and packages (including programming languages where appropriate);
  • P5.   design, and where appropriate construct, new systems, components or processes;
  • P6.   undertake testing of design ideas in the laboratory or by simulation, and analyse and critically evaluate the results;
  • P7.   search for, retrieve and evaluate information, ideas and data from a variety of sources;
  • P8.   manage a project and produce technical reports, papers, diagrams and drawings at an appropriate level.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • T1.   manipulate, sort and present data in a range of forms;
  • T2.   use evidence based methods in the solution of complex problems;
  • T3.   work with limited, incomplete and/or contradictory information in the solution of unfamiliar problems;
  • T4.   use an engineering and/or systems approach to the solution of problems in unfamiliar situations;
  • T5.   be creative and innovative in problem solving;
  • T6.   work effectively as part of a team and show potential for leadership;
  • T7.   use a wide range of information and communications technology;
  • T8.   manage time and resources;
  • T9.   use appropriate management tools;
  • T10.  communicate effectively orally, visually and in writing at an appropriate level;
  • T11.  learn effectively, continuously and independently in a variety of environments.

4. Programme structure

 

4.1       Part A - Introductory Modules

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
ELA005 Electromagnetism A 10 1+2 C
ELA004 Signals and Systems 10 1+2 C
ELA007 Introduction to Systems Engineering for Projects 20 1+2 C
MAA303 Mathematics A 20 1+2 C
ELA001 Circuits 20 1+2 C
ELA003 Electronics A 20 1+2 C
ELA010 Programming and Software Design 20 1+2 C

The 20 credit module ELA001 Circuits is taught over both semesters, 2/3 of the module is taught in Semester 1 and 1/3 in Semester 2.

 

4.2       Part B - Degree Modules

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
ELB002 Communications 15 1+2 C
ELB003 Electromechanical Systems 15 1+2 C
ELB004 Control System Design 15 1+2 C
ELB010 Electronics B 20 1+2 C
ELB013 Engineering Project Management 20 1+2 C
MAB303 Mathematics B 20 1+2 C
ELB012 Renewable Energy Systems Analysis 15 1+2 O
ELB014 Software Engineering 15 1+2 O
ELB019 Computer Architecture 15 1+2 O
MMB140 Mechanics 15 1+2 O

Students should take one of the optional (o) modules indicated. 

 

4.3       Part I

Code Title
WSI010 Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (Non-credit bearing)
WSI020 Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (Non-credit bearing)
WSI035 Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) (Non-credit bearing)

For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS),Part I will be between Parts B and C or between Parts C and D and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.

 

 

4.3       Part C - Degree Modules

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSC008 Business Management 15 1+2 C
WSD001 Team Project 30 1+2 C
WSC002 Principles of Digital Communications 15 1+2 OA
WSC003 Renewable Energy Sources 15 1+2 OA
WSC004 Computer Networks 15 1+2 OA
WSC007 Electromagnetism C 15 1+2 OA
WSC012 Systems Engineering Applications Theory 15 1+2 OA
WSC013 Electromagnetic Compatibility 15 1+2 OA
WSC014 Biophotonics Engineering 15 1+2 OA
WSC018 Real-Time Software Engineering 15 1+2 OA
WSC022 Power Electronics for Renewables 15 1+2 OA
WSC030 Bioelectricity - Fundamentals and Applications 15 1+2 OA
WSC039 Microwave Communication Systems 15 1+2 OA
WSC041 Digital and State Space Control 15 1+2 OA
WSC054 Electronic System Design with FPGA's 15 1+2 OA
WSC055 Digital Interfacing and Instrumentation 15 1+2 OA
WSC056 Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing 15 1+2 OA
DSC502 Human Factors in Systems Design C 15 1+2 OA
MPC022 Materials Properties and Applications 15 1+2 OA
XXXXXX Options from the University Catalogue 30 1+2 OB

 

The option OB allows a free choice of modules worth 30 credits from the University Catalogue. This choice should be restricted to modules from Part B, C or D level, subject to the overall requirement for the Part that at least 90 credits should be from Part C level or above. Choosing modules from Part D may result in examinations at the end of Semester 1. This free choice includes language modules from the University-wide Language Programme.  The total of 120 credits should be arranged as near to 60 credits per semester as possible. 

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

 

4.4       Part D - Degree Modules

 

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSD030 Advanced Project 50 1+2 C
WSD034 Applying Management Theory 10 1+2 C
WSD506 Digital Signal Processing 15 1 OA
WSD509 Communication Networks 15 1 OA
WSD510 Personal Radio Communications 15 1 OA
WSD511 Information Theory and Coding 15 1 OA
WSD515 Communication Channels 15 1 OA
WSD530 Programming Multi-Many Core Systems 15 1 OA
WSD531 Sustainability and Energy Systems 15 1 OA
WSD533 Solar Power 15 1 OA
WSD534 Wind Power 1 15 1 OA
WSD535 Water Power 15 1 OA
WSD536 Biomass 1 15 1 OA
WSD568 Sensors and Actuators for Control 15 1 OA
WSD062 Understanding Complexity 15 2 OA
WSD508 Digital Signal Processing for Software Defined Radio 15 2 OA
WSD516 Telecommunications Network Security 15 2 OA
WSD517 Mobile Network Technologies 15 2 OA
WSD523 Antennas 15 2 OA
WSD525 Advanced Electronic Engineering Applications 15 2 OA
WSD526 Radio Frequency and Microwave Integrated Circuit Design 15 2 OA
WSD532 Integration of Renewables 15 2 OA
WSD538 Energy Storage 10 2 OA
WSD539 Solar Thermal Systems 10 2 OA
WSD540 Advanced Photovoltaics 10 2 OA
WSD541 Wind Power 2 10 2 OA
WSD032 Microwave Circuits Laboratory 15 1+2 OB
XXXXXX Options from the University Catalogue 30 1+2 OC

The optional modules listed oA are block taught in one week or two week long blocks, while those listed oB run over both semesters.

The option oC allows a free choice of modules worth 30 credits from the University Catalogue. This choice should be restricted to modules from Part C or D level, subject to the overall requirement for the Part that at least 90 credits should be from Part D level or above. This free choice includes language modules from the University-wide Language Programme.  The total of 120 credits should be arranged as near to 60 credits per semester as possible. 

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

 

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 Criteria for Programme Progression

 

Progression from Part A to Part B, Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D will be subject to provisions set out in Regulation XX and in addition candidates must accumulate 120 credits and achieve an overall average of 55% in that part.

 

For candidates who commence study on the programme before October, 2016:

To progress from Part A to Part B, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part A, with no module mark less than 30% and obtain an average mark in Part A of at least 55%.

To progress from Part B to either Part C or Part I, (a period of professional training and/or study at an approved institution abroad, DIS or DIntS), candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part B, with no module mark less than 30% and obtain an average mark in Part B of at least 55%.

To progress from Part C to either Part D or Part I, (a period of professional training and/or study at an approved institution abroad, DIS or DIntS), candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part C, with no module mark less than 30% and obtain an average mark in Part C of at least 55%.

5.2 Degree award

To qualify for the award of the degree of Master of Engineering, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part D, with no module marks less than 30%. In addition, candidates should normally obtain a mark of at least 50% in all modules with codes of the form WSD5xx taken in Part D

 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

A candidate's final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments at Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX.  The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 15: Part C 42.5: Part D 42.5, to determine the final Programme Mark.

Programme Specification

EL MEng (Hons) Electronic and Electrical Engineering (Students undertaking Part D in 2019)

Academic Year: 2019/20

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)
Institute of Measurement and Control (InstMC)
Energy Institute (EI)

See also further details in 'Programme Structure' below.

 

Final award MEng/ MEng+DIS / MEng+DIntS
Programme title Electronic and Electrical Engineering
Programme code WSUM10
Length of programme The duration of the programme is 8 semesters or 10 semesters if taken with either the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) or the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS). The programme is only available on a full-time basis.
UCAS code H601, H605
Admissions criteria

http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/electronic-electrical-engineering/

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

To meet the aims of the BEng programme in Electronic and Electrical Engineering and to further enhance a student’s learning experience by providing a high quality educational experience, for well motivated high achievers, that:

  • A1.   increases the depth and breadth of technical study to the level expected of Masters level graduates;
  • A2.   develops knowledge and skills, to a depth and breadth expected of Masters level graduates, as a preparation for a career in the electronic and electrical engineering industry;
  • A3.   develops an enhanced capacity for independent learning, planning and self–reliance;
  • A4.   enhances teamwork and leadership skills, equipping graduates of the programme to play leading roles in industry and potentially take responsibility for future innovation and change.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence; Engineering Technician, Incorporated Engineer and Chartered Engineer Standard, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2013.

UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence; The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2014.

Guidance Note on Academic Accreditation, Engineering Council UK, 2014.

The UK Quality Code for Higher Education. The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, April 2012.

Subject Benchmark Statement: Engineering, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, November 2010.

 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate a knowledge and understanding of:

  • K1.   mathematical methods appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines, including their limitations and range of applicability
  • K2.   principles of engineering and/or systems science appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines, including their range of applicability;
  • K3.   principles of Information Technology and Communications appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines;
  • K4.   design principles and techniques appropriate to relevant components, equipment and associated software;
  • K5.   characteristics of relevant engineering materials and components;
  • K6.   management and business practices appropriate to engineering industries, their application and limitations;
  • K7.   codes of practice and regulatory frameworks relevant to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines;
  • K8.   operational practices and requirements for safe operation relevant to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines;
  • K9.   the professional and ethical responsibilities of engineers;
  • K10.  team roles, team-working skills and leadership skills;
  • K11.  relevant research methods.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate:

  • C1.   an understanding of standard mathematical and/or computer based methods for modelling and analysing a range of practical and hypothetical engineering problems, and the essential principles of modelling and analysing routine engineering systems, processes, components and products;
  • C2.   an ability to develop innovative solutions to practical engineering problems;
  • C3.   a competence in defining and solving practical engineering problems;
  • C4.   the ability to apply systems processes in a range of different engineering contexts.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • P1.   use appropriate or novel mathematical methods for modelling and analysing pertinent engineering problems;
  • P2.   select and use relevant test and measurement equipment;
  • P3.   plan and execute safely novel or unfamiliar experimental laboratory work;
  • P4.   select and use computational tools and packages (including programming languages where appropriate);
  • P5.   design, and where appropriate construct, new systems, components or processes;
  • P6.   undertake testing of design ideas in the laboratory or by simulation, and analyse and critically evaluate the results;
  • P7.   search for, retrieve and evaluate information, ideas and data from a variety of sources;
  • P8.   manage a project and produce technical reports, papers, diagrams and drawings at an appropriate level.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • T1.   manipulate, sort and present data in a range of forms;
  • T2.   use evidence based methods in the solution of complex problems;
  • T3.   work with limited, incomplete and/or contradictory information in the solution of unfamiliar problems;
  • T4.   use an engineering and/or systems approach to the solution of problems in unfamiliar situations;
  • T5.   be creative and innovative in problem solving;
  • T6.   work effectively as part of a team and show potential for leadership;
  • T7.   use a wide range of information and communications technology;
  • T8.   manage time and resources;
  • T9.   use appropriate management tools;
  • T10.  communicate effectively orally, visually and in writing at an appropriate level;
  • T11.  learn effectively, continuously and independently in a variety of environments.

4. Programme structure

These Programme Specifications apply to the conduct of the programme in the 2017-18 session and should not be construed as being relevant to any other session.  These Programme Specifications may be subject to change from time to time.  Notice of change will be given by the School responsible for the programme.

In the following tables, ‘c’ indicates a compulsory module and ‘o’ indicates an optional module. The optional modules ‘oA’, ‘oB’ ‘oC’ and 'oD' should be considered along with the text following the table they appear in.  

Modules indicated as being taught in both Semester 1 and Semester 2 have elements of assessment in each semester however examinations for these modules normally occur during the Semester 2 examination period. Modules indicated as being taught in a single semester are assessed entirely within that semester. 

 

4.1       Part A - Introductory Modules

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
ELA005 Electromagnetism A 10 1+2 C
ELA004 Signals and Systems 10 1+2 C
ELA007 Introduction to Systems Engineering for Projects 20 1+2 C
MAA303 Mathematics A 20 1+2 C
ELA001 Circuits 20 1+2 C
ELA003 Electronics A 20 1+2 C
ELA010 Programming and Software Design 20 1+2 C

The 20 credit module ELA001 Circuits is taught over both semesters, 2/3 of the module is taught in Semester 1 and 1/3 in Semester 2.

 

4.2       Part B - Degree Modules

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
ELB002 Communications 15 1+2 C
ELB003 Electromechanical Systems 15 1+2 C
ELB004 Control System Design 15 1+2 C
ELB010 Electronics B 20 1+2 C
ELB013 Engineering Project Management 20 1+2 C
MAB303 Mathematics B 20 1+2 C
ELB012 Renewable Energy Systems Analysis 15 1+2 O
ELB014 Software Engineering 15 1+2 O
ELB019 Computer Architecture 15 1+2 O
MMB140 Mechanics 15 1+2 O

Students should take one of the optional (o) modules indicated. 

 

4.3       Part C - Degree Modules

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
ELC008 Business Management 15 1+2 C
ELD002 Group Project 30 1+2 C
ELB014 Software Engineering 15 1+2 OA
ELB019 Computer Architecture 15 1+2 OA
MMB140 Mechanics 15 1+2 OA
ELC002 Principles of Digital Communications 15 1+2 OB
ELC003 Renewable Energy Sources 15 1+2 OB
ELC004 Computer Networks 15 1+2 OB
ELC006 Fast Transient 15 1+2 OB
ELC007 Electromagnetism C 15 1+2 OB
ELC012 Systems Engineering Applications Theory 15 1+2 OB
ELC013 Electromagnetic Compatibility 15 1+2 OB
ELC014 Biophotonics Engineering 15 1+2 OB
ELC018 Real-Time Software Engineering 15 1+2 OB
ELC022 Power Electronics for Renewables 15 1+2 OB
ELC030 Bioelectricity - Fundamentals and Applications 15 1+2 OB
ELC039 Microwave Communication Systems 15 1+2 OB
ELC041 Digital and State Space Control 15 1+2 OB
ELC054 Electronic System Design with FPGA's 15 1+2 OB
ELC055 Digital Interfacing and Instrumentation 15 1+2 OB
ELC056 Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing 15 1+2 OB
DSC502 Human Factors in Systems Design 15 1+2 OB
MPC022 Materials Properties and Applications 15 1+2 OB
XXXXXX Options from the University Catalogue 30 1+2 OC

Options listed as oA will normally continue to be delivered throughout the Semester 1 examination period, while options listed as oB will normally be suspended during the Semester 1 examination period. No more than two oA modules should be chosen and only where they were not taken at Part B.  

The option oC allows a free choice of modules worth 30 credits from the University Catalogue. This choice should be restricted to modules from Part B, C or D level, subject to the overall requirement for the Part that at least 90 credits should be from Part C level or above. Choosing modules from Part D may result in examinations at the end of Semester 1. This free choice includes language modules from the University-wide Language Programme.  The total of 120 credits should be arranged as near to 60 credits per semester as possible. 

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

 

4.4       Part D - Degree Modules

 

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSD030 Advanced Project 50 1+2 C
WSD034 Applying Management Theory 10 1+2 C
WSD506 Digital Signal Processing 15 1 OA
WSD509 Communication Networks 15 1 OA
WSD510 Personal Radio Communications 15 1 OA
WSD511 Information Theory and Coding 15 1 OA
WSD515 Communication Channels 15 1 OA
WSD530 Programming Multi-Many Core Systems 15 1 OA
WSD531 Sustainability and Energy Systems 15 1 OA
WSD533 Solar Power 15 1 OA
WSD534 Wind Power 1 15 1 OA
WSD535 Water Power 15 1 OA
WSD536 Biomass 1 15 1 OA
WSD568 Sensors and Actuators for Control 15 1 OA
WSD062 Understanding Complexity 15 2 OA
WSD508 Digital Signal Processing for Software Defined Radio 15 2 OA
WSD516 Telecommunications Network Security 15 2 OA
WSD517 Mobile Network Technologies 15 2 OA
WSD523 Antennas 15 2 OA
WSD525 Advanced Electronic Engineering Applications 15 2 OA
WSD526 Radio Frequency and Microwave Integrated Circuit Design 15 2 OA
WSD532 Integration of Renewables 15 2 OA
WSD538 Energy Storage 10 2 OA
WSD539 Solar Thermal Systems 10 2 OA
WSD540 Advanced Photovoltaics 10 2 OA
WSD541 Wind Power 2 10 2 OA
WSD032 Microwave Circuits Laboratory 15 1+2 OB
XXXXXX Options from the University Catalogue 30 1+2 OC

The optional modules listed oA are block taught in one week or two week long blocks, while those listed oB run over both semesters.

The option oC allows a free choice of modules worth 30 credits from the University Catalogue. This choice should be restricted to modules from Part C or D level, subject to the overall requirement for the Part that at least 90 credits should be from Part D level or above. This free choice includes language modules from the University-wide Language Programme.  The total of 120 credits should be arranged as near to 60 credits per semester as possible. 

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

 

4.5  Part I

For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) or the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS),Part I will be between Parts B and C or between Parts C and D and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.

 

 

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 Criteria for Programme Progression

 

Progression from Part A to Part B, Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D will be subject to provisions set out in Regulation XX and in addition candidates must accumulate 120 credits and achieve an overall average of 55% in that part.

 

For candidates who commence study on the programme before October, 2016:

To progress from Part A to Part B, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part A, with no module mark less than 30% and obtain an average mark in Part A of at least 55%.

To progress from Part B to either Part C or Part I, (a period of professional training and/or study at an approved institution abroad, DIS or DIntS), candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part B, with no module mark less than 30% and obtain an average mark in Part B of at least 55%.

To progress from Part C to either Part D or Part I, (a period of professional training and/or study at an approved institution abroad, DIS or DIntS), candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part C, with no module mark less than 30% and obtain an average mark in Part C of at least 55%.

5.2 Degree award

To qualify for the award of the degree of Master of Engineering, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part D, with no module marks less than 30%. In addition, candidates should normally obtain a mark of at least 50% in all modules with codes of the form WSD5xx taken in Part D

 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

A candidate's final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments at Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX.  The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 15: Part C 42.5: Part D 42.5, to determine the final Programme Mark.

Programme Specification

EL MEng (Hons) Systems Engineering (Students undertaking Part C in 2019)

Academic Year: 2019/20

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)

Final award MEng / MEng+DIS / MEng + DPS/ MEng+DIntS
Programme title Systems Engineering
Programme code WSUM20
Length of programme The duration of the programme is 8 semesters or 10 semesters if taken with the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS). The programme is only available on a full-time basis.
UCAS code H660, H641
Admissions criteria

 http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/systems­engineering/

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

To meet the all of the aims of the MEng programme in Systems Engineering and to further enhance a student’s learning experience by providing a high quality educational experience, for well motivated high achievers, that:

  • A1.   increases the depth and breadth of technical study to the level expected of Masters level graduates;
  • A2.   develops knowledge and skills, to a depth and breadth expected of Masters level graduates, as a preparation for a career in industry;
  • A3.   takes the student through the first level expected when applying for chartered engineer status
  • A4.   develops an enhanced capacity for independent learning, planning, self–reliance and self- evaluation;
  • A5.   enhances teamwork and leadership skills, equipping graduates of the programme to play leading roles in industry and potentially take responsibility for future innovation and change;
  • A6.   develop an appreciation for complexity and uncertainty in engineering systems;
  • A7.   Provides an introduction to and experience of mentoring and evaluation processes and techniques enabling the student to articulate identified issues and suggest alternative approaches within a system design context;
  • A8.   Provides an opportunity to work in a multi-disciplinary team and to apply project management and engineering theory and practice in a collaborative and competitive
  • A9.   environment to build and demonstrate a complex autonomous system capable of fulfilling a changing set of requirements;
  • A10.  Increases the awareness of the complexities in the configuration of Systems of Systems (SoS) particularly at the interfaces of the component systems and hence the need to take a holistic view of SoS development and operation;
  • A11.  Develops a deeper understanding of the socio-technical aspects of systems and systems of systems design and operation.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: Engineering Technician, Incorporated Engineer and Chartered Engineer Standard, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2013.
  • UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2014.
  • Guidance Note on Academic Accreditation, Engineering Council UK, July 2014.
  • The UK Quality Code for Higher Education, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, April 2012.
  • Subject Benchmark Statement: Engineering, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, November 2010.
  • Master's Degree Characteristics, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, March 2010.

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate a knowledge and understanding of:

 

  • K1.   the nature of systems thinking and systems engineering concepts and terminology;
  • K2.   the form and value of systems engineering-based techniques, methods and methodologies and their use in the development and evaluation of complex systems and systems of systems in a range of engineering and commercial domains;
  • K3.   the provenance and theory behind a range of systems and systems engineering tools, methods and processes;
  • K4.   the need for an integrated systems approach using appropriate and timely configurations of systems engineering methods, tools and processes;
  • K5.   the importance of integrating Requirements Specification, Systems Design and Validation and Verification approaches along the whole systems life cycle;
  • K6.   the role and limitations of systems architecture approaches: the interfaces between technical sub-systems with organisational, human and process sub systems;
  • K7.   Engineering and Management of Capability;
  • K8.   the theory behind and application of mentoring approaches;
  • K9.   the theory behind and application of formal project evaluation methods and practice;
  • K10.  mathematical methods appropriate to systems engineering and related disciplines, including their limitations and range of applicability;
  • K11.  principles of engineering and/or systems science appropriate to engineering and related disciplines, including their range of applicability;
  • K12.  principles of information technology and communications appropriate to engineering of complex systems;
  • K13.  knowledge and information management techniques and tools;
  • K14.  design principles and techniques appropriate to relevant components, equipment and associated software;
  • K15.  characteristics of relevant common engineering materials and components;
  • K16.  management and business practices appropriate to engineering industries, their application and limitations;
  • K17.  relevant codes of practice and regulatory frameworks relevant to systems engineering and related disciplines;
  • K18.  operational practices and requirements for safe operation relevant to electronic and electrical engineering;
  • K19.  the professional and ethical responsibilities of engineers;
  • K20.  research methodologies and approaches;
  • K21.  ability to deal with uncertain, incomplete and changing information in a dynamic systems or systems of systems context.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate:

 

  • C1.   an ability to apply a systems engineering approach to engineering, problem structuring and problem solving in a variety of engineering contexts;
  • C2.   ability to select and apply different systems engineering tools, methods and processes based on both an understanding of the theory behind the tools and an appreciation of their functionality and applicability to the system context;
  • C3.   the role and processes involved in mentoring individuals and groups and evaluation of projects against goals set;
  • C4.   an understanding of standard mathematical and/or computer based methods for modelling and analysing a range of practical and hypothetical engineering problems, and the essential principles of modelling and analysing routine engineering systems, processes, components and products;
  • C5.   an appreciation of the socio-technical aspects of system design and operation and the application of methods and techniques available in this area;
  • C6.   a competency in systems architecting approaches;
  • C7.   an understanding of a range of areas dependent on modules studied eg control techniques used in industry, aeronautical considerations of aircraft design and performance, different renewable energy generation technologies, human factors in systems design, financial management, system architecting, innovation etc.
  • C8.   an ability to develop innovative solutions to practical engineering problems;
  • C9.   a competence in defining and solving practical engineering problems;
  • C10.  the ability to integrate, evaluate and use information, data and ideas from a range of sources in their project work.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

 

  • P1.   develop a viable systems engineering approach to the development of complex systems and systems of systems in a range of engineering and commercial environments;
  • P2.   analyse and identify a problem space, extract and formalize a requirements specification   for a system of interest and select and apply appropriate systems design and validation and verification methods within a defined systems engineering process along the whole system lifecycle;
  • P3.   select and use conventional laboratory equipment and relevant test and measurement equipment in a safe manner;
  • P4.   research, select and use computational tools and packages (including programming and modelling languages where appropriate) in familiar situations for modeling and analysing pertinent engineering problems;
  • P5.   design, and where appropriate construct, systems, components or processes in a muli- disciplinary team within given time and resource constraints;
  • P6.   search for, locate, retrieve and reference correctly information, ideas and data from a variety of sources;
  • P7.   manage a project and the inherent technical and project management risks, and produce technical reports, papers, diagrams and drawings.
  • P8.   plan and execute safely novel or unfamiliar experimental laboratory work;
  • P9.   undertake testing of design ideas in the laboratory or by simulation, and analyse and critically evaluate the results.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should have the following skills and abilities:

  • T1.   Self-management : readiness to accept responsibility, flexibility, resilience, self-starting, appropriate assertiveness, time management, readiness to improve own performance based on feedback/reflective learning
  • T2.   Team-working: respecting others, co-operating, negotiating/persuading, contributing to discussions, interpersonal skills and awareness of interdependence with others
  • T3.   Leadership: project and group management, delegation v control, verbal and written communication, creativity, problem solving and financial/time/risk management
  • T4.   Analysis and investigation: use of systems engineering approaches, tools and techniques to gather and analyse information systematically to aid decision-making and critical thinking skills
  • T5.   Business and customer awareness: Basic understanding of the key drivers for business success – including the importance of innovation and taking calculated risks – and the need to provide customer satisfaction and build customer loyalty
  • T6.   Problem solving: analysing facts and situations and applying creative thinking to develop appropriate solutions
  • T7.   Communication and literacy: application of literacy, ability to produce clear, structured written work and oral literacy – including listening and questioning
  • T8.   Positive attitude: a ‘can-do’ approach, self- motivation, a readiness to take part and contribute, openness to new ideas and a drive to make these happen
  • T9.   Entrepreneurship and enterprise: broadly, an ability to demonstrate an innovative approach, creativity, collaboration and risk taking. An individual with these attributes can make a huge difference to any business
  • T10.  IT and networks: programming and application development, databases, modeling software, spreadsheets, word processing, graphics and multi-media
  • T11.  Risk Management and mitigation
  • T12.  Generation and selection of alternative solutions to different classes of engineering/system design problems using a range of methods
  • T13.  manipulate, sort and present data in a range of forms
  • T14.  use evidence based methods and investigative techniques in the solution of complex problems
  • T15.  work with limited, incomplete and/or contradictory information in the solution of unfamiliar problems
  • T16.  Mentoring and evaluation skills including self reflection on performance
  • T17.  Production and deliver of professional and effective presentations using a range of media
  • T18.  Ability to learn effectively, continuously and independently in a variety of environments

 

4. Programme structure

These Programme Specifications apply to the conduct of the programme in the 2018-­19 session and should not be construed as being relevant to any other session.  These Programme Specifications may be subject to change from time to time. Notice of change will be given by the School responsible for the programme. 

In the following tables, ‘c’ indicates a compulsory module and ‘o’ indicates an optional module. 

Modules which are indicated as being taught in both Semester 1 and Semester 2 have elements of assessment in each semester however examinations for these modules normally occur during the Semester 2 examination period. Modules indicated as being taught in a single semester are assessed entirely within that semester. 

4.1 Part A 

Code

Title

Weight

Semester

C/O 

ELA005

Electromagnetism A

10

2

C

ELA004

Signals and Systems

10

1+2

C

ELA007

Introduction to Systems Engineering for Projects

20

1+2

C

MAA303

Mathematics A

20

1+2

C

ELA001

Circuits

20

1+2

C

ELA003

Electronics A

20

1+2

C

ELA010

Programming and Software Design

20

1+2

C

 

4.2 Part B 

Candidates must choose two options ‘o’. 

Code

Title

Weight

Semester

C/O 

ELB006

Systems Integration

20

1+2

C

ELB007

Systems Methods

20

1+2

C

MAB303

Mathematics B

20

1+2

C

ELB004 Control System Design 15 1+2 C
ELB008 Aircraft Design 15 1+2 C

ELB002

Communications

15

1+2

O

ELB003

Electromechanical Systems

15

1+2

O

ELB140

Mechanics

15

1+2

O

 

4.3 Part C

Code

Title

WSI010 Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (Non-credit bearing)
WSI020 Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (Non-credit bearing)
WSI035 Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) (Non-credit bearing)

For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DIntS), Part I will be between Parts B and C or between Parts C and D and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.

 

4.4 Part C 

Candidates must choose one option ‘o’ from each semester 

Code

Title

Weight

Semester

C/O 

WSD001

Team Project

30

1+2

C

DSC502

Human Factors in Systems Engineering C

15

1+2

C

MPC022

Materials Properties and Applications

15

1+2

C

WSC012

Systems Engineering Applications Theory

15

1+2

C

WSC003

Renewable Energy Sources

15

1+2

OA

WSC007

Electromagnetism C

15

1+2

OA

WSC008

Business Management

15

1+2

OA

WSC013

Electromagnetic Compatibility

15

1+2

OA

WSC014

Biophotonics Engineering

15

1+2

OA

WSC030

Bioelectricity - Fundamentals and Applications

15

1+2

OA

WSC041

Digital and State Space Control

15

1+2

OA

WSC056 Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing 15 1+2

OA

XXXXXX Options from the University Catalogue 30 1+2

OB

The option OB allows a free choice of modules worth 30 credits from the University Catalogue. This choice should be restricted to modules from Part C or D level, subject to the overall requirement for the Part that at least 90 credits should be from Part D level or above. The total of 120 credits should be arranged as near to 60 credits per semester as possible.

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

 

 

4.5 Part D 

Candidates must choose exactly 45 credits of option modules, a minimum of 15 credits of which must be from those labelled OA. The remaining credit can be from options labelled OA, OB or OC. 

Code

Title

Weight

Semester

C/O 

WSD030

Advanced Project

50

1+2

C

WSD033

Systems Diagnostics

10

1+2

C

WSD062

Understanding Complexity

15

2

C

WSD572

Systems Architecture

15

1

OA

WSD060

Engineering and Managing Capability

15

2

OA

WSD566

Systems Design

15

1

OA

WSD567

Validation and Verification

15

2

OA

WSD571

Holistic Engineering

15

2

OA

WSD536

Biomass 1

15

1

OB

WSD506

Digital Signal Processing

15

1

OB

WSD569

Innovation and Entrepreneurship in Engineering

15

1

OB

WSD533

Solar Power

15

1

OB

WSD535

Water Power

15

1

OB

WSD534

Wind Power 1

15

1

OB

WSD532

Integration of Renewables

15

2

OB

WSD517

Mobile Network Technologies

15

2

OB

XXXXXX

Options from the University Catalogue

30

1+2

OC

 

The optional modules listed oA and oB are block taught in one week or two week long blocks.

 

The option oC allows a free choice of modules worth 30 credits from the University Catalogue. This choice should be restricted to modules from Part C or D level, subject to the overall requirement for the Part that at least 90 credits should be from Part D level or above. The total of 120 credits should be arranged as near to 60 credits per semester as possible.

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and student having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

 

  

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 Criteria for programme progression 

 

Progression from Part A to Part B, Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D will be subject to provisions set out in Regulation XX and in addition candidates must accumulate 120 credits and achieve an overall average of 55% in that part.

 

For candidates who commence study on the programme before October, 2016:

To progress from Part A to Part B, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part A, with no module mark less than 30% and obtain an average mark in Part A of at least 55%.

To progress from Part B to either Part C or Part I, (a period of professional training and/or study at an approved institution abroad, DIS or DIntS), candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part B, with no module mark less than 30% and obtain an average mark in Part B of at least 55%.

To progress from Part C to either Part D or Part I, (a period of professional training and/or study at an approved institution abroad, DIS or DIntS), candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part C, with no module mark less than 30% and obtain an average mark in Part C of at least 55%.

 

5.2 Degree Award 

To qualify for the award of the degree of Master of Engineering, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part D, with no module marks less than 30%. In addition, candidates should normally obtain a mark of at least 50% in all modules with codes of the form WSD5xx taken in Part D.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

A candidate's final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments at Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 15: Part C 42.5: Part D 42.5, to determine the final Programme Mark.

Programme Specification

EL MEng (Hons) Systems Engineering (Students undertaking Part D in 2019)

Academic Year: 2019/20

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)

Final award MEng / MEng+DIS / MEng+DIntS
Programme title Systems Engineering
Programme code WSUM20
Length of programme The duration of the programme is 8 semesters or 10 semesters if taken with the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) or the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS). The programme is only available on a full-time basis.
UCAS code H660, H641
Admissions criteria

 http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/systems­engineering/

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

To meet the all of the aims of the MEng programme in Systems Engineering and to further enhance a student’s learning experience by providing a high quality educational experience, for well motivated high achievers, that:

  • A1.   increases the depth and breadth of technical study to the level expected of Masters level graduates;
  • A2.   develops knowledge and skills, to a depth and breadth expected of Masters level graduates, as a preparation for a career in industry;
  • A3.   takes the student through the first level expected when applying for chartered engineer status
  • A4.   develops an enhanced capacity for independent learning, planning, self–reliance and self- evaluation;
  • A5.   enhances teamwork and leadership skills, equipping graduates of the programme to play leading roles in industry and potentially take responsibility for future innovation and change;
  • A6.   develop an appreciation for complexity and uncertainty in engineering systems;
  • A7.   Provides an introduction to and experience of mentoring and evaluation processes and techniques enabling the student to articulate identified issues and suggest alternative approaches within a system design context;
  • A8.   Provides an opportunity to work in a multi-disciplinary team and to apply project management and engineering theory and practice in a collaborative and competitive
  • A9.   environment to build and demonstrate a complex autonomous system capable of fulfilling a changing set of requirements;
  • A10.  Increases the awareness of the complexities in the configuration of Systems of Systems (SoS) particularly at the interfaces of the component systems and hence the need to take a holistic view of SoS development and operation;
  • A11.  Develops a deeper understanding of the socio-technical aspects of systems and systems of systems design and operation.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: Engineering Technician, Incorporated Engineer and Chartered Engineer Standard, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2013.
  • UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2014.
  • Guidance Note on Academic Accreditation, Engineering Council UK, July 2014.
  • The UK Quality Code for Higher Education, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, April 2012.
  • Subject Benchmark Statement: Engineering, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, November 2010.
  • Master's Degree Characteristics, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, March 2010.

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate a knowledge and understanding of:

 

  • K1.   the nature of systems thinking and systems engineering concepts and terminology;
  • K2.   the form and value of systems engineering-based techniques, methods and methodologies and their use in the development and evaluation of complex systems and systems of systems in a range of engineering and commercial domains;
  • K3.   the provenance and theory behind a range of systems and systems engineering tools, methods and processes;
  • K4.   the need for an integrated systems approach using appropriate and timely configurations of systems engineering methods, tools and processes;
  • K5.   the importance of integrating Requirements Specification, Systems Design and Validation and Verification approaches along the whole systems life cycle;
  • K6.   the role and limitations of systems architecture approaches: the interfaces between technical sub-systems with organisational, human and process sub systems;
  • K7.   Engineering and Management of Capability;
  • K8.   the theory behind and application of mentoring approaches;
  • K9.   the theory behind and application of formal project evaluation methods and practice;
  • K10.  mathematical methods appropriate to systems engineering and related disciplines, including their limitations and range of applicability;
  • K11.  principles of engineering and/or systems science appropriate to engineering and related disciplines, including their range of applicability;
  • K12.  principles of information technology and communications appropriate to engineering of complex systems;
  • K13.  knowledge and information management techniques and tools;
  • K14.  design principles and techniques appropriate to relevant components, equipment and associated software;
  • K15.  characteristics of relevant common engineering materials and components;
  • K16.  management and business practices appropriate to engineering industries, their application and limitations;
  • K17.  relevant codes of practice and regulatory frameworks relevant to systems engineering and related disciplines;
  • K18.  operational practices and requirements for safe operation relevant to electronic and electrical engineering;
  • K19.  the professional and ethical responsibilities of engineers;
  • K20.  research methodologies and approaches;
  • K21.  ability to deal with uncertain, incomplete and changing information in a dynamic systems or systems of systems context.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate:

 

  • C1.   an ability to apply a systems engineering approach to engineering, problem structuring and problem solving in a variety of engineering contexts;
  • C2.   ability to select and apply different systems engineering tools, methods and processes based on both an understanding of the theory behind the tools and an appreciation of their functionality and applicability to the system context;
  • C3.   the role and processes involved in mentoring individuals and groups and evaluation of projects against goals set;
  • C4.   an understanding of standard mathematical and/or computer based methods for modelling and analysing a range of practical and hypothetical engineering problems, and the essential principles of modelling and analysing routine engineering systems, processes, components and products;
  • C5.   an appreciation of the socio-technical aspects of system design and operation and the application of methods and techniques available in this area;
  • C6.   a competency in systems architecting approaches;
  • C7.   an understanding of a range of areas dependent on modules studied eg control techniques used in industry, aeronautical considerations of aircraft design and performance, different renewable energy generation technologies, human factors in systems design, financial management, system architecting, innovation etc.
  • C8.   an ability to develop innovative solutions to practical engineering problems;
  • C9.   a competence in defining and solving practical engineering problems;
  • C10.  the ability to integrate, evaluate and use information, data and ideas from a range of sources in their project work.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

 

  • P1.   develop a viable systems engineering approach to the development of complex systems and systems of systems in a range of engineering and commercial environments;
  • P2.   analyse and identify a problem space, extract and formalize a requirements specification   for a system of interest and select and apply appropriate systems design and validation and verification methods within a defined systems engineering process along the whole system lifecycle;
  • P3.   select and use conventional laboratory equipment and relevant test and measurement equipment in a safe manner;
  • P4.   research, select and use computational tools and packages (including programming and modelling languages where appropriate) in familiar situations for modeling and analysing pertinent engineering problems;
  • P5.   design, and where appropriate construct, systems, components or processes in a muli- disciplinary team within given time and resource constraints;
  • P6.   search for, locate, retrieve and reference correctly information, ideas and data from a variety of sources;
  • P7.   manage a project and the inherent technical and project management risks, and produce technical reports, papers, diagrams and drawings.
  • P8.   plan and execute safely novel or unfamiliar experimental laboratory work;
  • P9.   undertake testing of design ideas in the laboratory or by simulation, and analyse and critically evaluate the results.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should have the following skills and abilities:

  • T1.   Self-management : readiness to accept responsibility, flexibility, resilience, self-starting, appropriate assertiveness, time management, readiness to improve own performance based on feedback/reflective learning
  • T2.   Team-working: respecting others, co-operating, negotiating/persuading, contributing to discussions, interpersonal skills and awareness of interdependence with others
  • T3.   Leadership: project and group management, delegation v control, verbal and written communication, creativity, problem solving and financial/time/risk management
  • T4.   Analysis and investigation: use of systems engineering approaches, tools and techniques to gather and analyse information systematically to aid decision-making and critical thinking skills
  • T5.   Business and customer awareness: Basic understanding of the key drivers for business success – including the importance of innovation and taking calculated risks – and the need to provide customer satisfaction and build customer loyalty
  • T6.   Problem solving: analysing facts and situations and applying creative thinking to develop appropriate solutions
  • T7.   Communication and literacy: application of literacy, ability to produce clear, structured written work and oral literacy – including listening and questioning
  • T8.   Positive attitude: a ‘can-do’ approach, self- motivation, a readiness to take part and contribute, openness to new ideas and a drive to make these happen
  • T9.   Entrepreneurship and enterprise: broadly, an ability to demonstrate an innovative approach, creativity, collaboration and risk taking. An individual with these attributes can make a huge difference to any business
  • T10.  IT and networks: programming and application development, databases, modeling software, spreadsheets, word processing, graphics and multi-media
  • T11.  Risk Management and mitigation
  • T12.  Generation and selection of alternative solutions to different classes of engineering/system design problems using a range of methods
  • T13.  manipulate, sort and present data in a range of forms
  • T14.  use evidence based methods and investigative techniques in the solution of complex problems
  • T15.  work with limited, incomplete and/or contradictory information in the solution of unfamiliar problems
  • T16.  Mentoring and evaluation skills including self reflection on performance
  • T17.  Production and deliver of professional and effective presentations using a range of media
  • T18.  Ability to learn effectively, continuously and independently in a variety of environments

 

4. Programme structure

These Programme Specifications apply to the conduct of the programme in the 2018-­19 session and should not be construed as being relevant to any other session.  These Programme Specifications may be subject to change from time to time. Notice of change will be given by the School responsible for the programme. 

In the following tables, ‘c’ indicates a compulsory module and ‘o’ indicates an optional module. 

Modules which are indicated as being taught in both Semester 1 and Semester 2 have elements of assessment in each semester however examinations for these modules normally occur during the Semester 2 examination period. Modules indicated as being taught in a single semester are assessed entirely within that semester. 

4.1 Part A 

Code

Title

Weight

Semester

C/O 

ELA005

Electromagnetism A

10

2

C

ELA004

Signals and Systems

10

1+2

C

ELA007

Introduction to Systems Engineering for Projects

20

1+2

C

MAA303

Mathematics A

20

1+2

C

ELA001

Circuits

20

1+2

C

ELA003

Electronics A

20

1+2

C

ELA010

Programming and Software Design

20

1+2

C

 

4.2 Part B 

Candidates must choose two options ‘o’. 

Code

Title

Weight

Semester

C/O 

ELB006

Systems Integration

20

1+2

C

ELB007

Systems Methods

20

1+2

C

MAB303

Mathematics B

20

1+2

C

ELB004 Control System Design 15 1+2 C
ELB008 Aircraft Design 15 1+2 C

ELB002

Communications

15

1+2

O

ELB003

Electromechanical Systems

15

1+2

O

ELB140

Mechanics

15

1+2

O

 

4.3 Part C 

Candidates must choose one option ‘o’ from each semester 

Code

Title

Weight

Semester

C/O 

ELD002

Group Project

30

1+2

C

DSC502

Human Factors in Systems Engineering

15

1+2

C

MPC022

Materials Properties and Applications

15

1+2

C

ELC012

Systems Engineering Applications Theory

15

1+2

C

ELB002

Communications

15

1+2

OA

ELB010

Electronics B

20

1+2

OA

ELB014

Software Engineering

15

1+2

OA

ELB019

Computer Architecture

15

1+2

OA

ELC003

Renewable Energy Sources

15

1+2

OB

ELC006

Fast Transient Sensors

15

1+2

OB

ELC007

Electromagnetism C

15

1+2

OB

ELC008

Business Management

15

1+2

OB

ELC013

Electromagnetic Compatibility

15

1+2

OB

ELC014

Biophotonics Engineering

15

1+2

OB

ELC030

Bioelectricity - Fundamentals and Applications

15

1+2

OB

ELC041

Digital and State Space Control

15

1+2

OB

ELC056 Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing 15 1+2

OB

XXXXXX Options from the University Catalogue 30 1+2

OC

Options listed as oA will normally continue to be delivered during the Semester 1 examination period, while options listed as oB will normally be suspended during the Semester 1 examination period. No more than two oA modules should be chosen and only where they were not taken at Part B.

The option oC allows a free choice of modules worth 30 credits from the University Catalogue. This choice should be restricted to modules from Part C or D level, subject to the overall requirement for the Part that at least 90 credits should be from Part D level or above. The total of 120 credits should be arranged as near to 60 credits per semester as possible.

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

 

 

4.4 Part D 

Candidates must choose exactly 45 credits of option modules, a minimum of 15 credits of which must be from those labelled OA. The remaining credit can be from options labelled OA, OB or OC. 

Code

Title

Weight

Semester

C/O 

WSD030

Advanced Project

50

1+2

C

WSD033

Systems Diagnostics

10

1+2

C

WSD062

Understanding Complexity

15

2

C

WSD572

Systems Architecture

15

1

OA

WSD060

Engineering and Managing Capability

15

2

OA

WSD566

Systems Design

15

1

OA

WSD567

Validation and Verification

15

2

OA

WSD571

Holistic Engineering

15

2

OA

WSD536

Biomass 1

15

1

OB

WSD506

Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing

15

1

OB

WSD569

Innovation and Entrepreneurship in Engineering

15

1

OB

WSD533

Solar Power

15

1

OB

WSD535

Water Power

15

1

OB

WSD534

Wind Power 1

15

1

OB

WSD532

Integration of Renewables

15

2

OB

WSD517

Mobile Network Technologies

15

2

OB

XXXXXX

Options from the University Catalogue

30

1+2

OC

 

The optional modules listed oA and oB are block taught in one week or two week long blocks.

 

The option oC allows a free choice of modules worth 30 credits from the University Catalogue. This choice should be restricted to modules from Part C or D level, subject to the overall requirement for the Part that at least 90 credits should be from Part D level or above. The total of 120 credits should be arranged as near to 60 credits per semester as possible.

 

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

  

4.5 Part I 

For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) or Diploma in International Studies (DIntS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C or between Parts C and D and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 Criteria for programme progression 

 

 

Progression from Part A to Part B, Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D will be subject to provisions set out in Regulation XX and in addition candidates must accumulate 120 credits and achieve an overall average of 55% in that part.

For candidates who commence study on the programme before October, 2016:

To progress from Part A to Part B, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part A, with no module mark less than 30% and obtain an average mark in Part A of at least 55%.

To progress from Part B to either Part C or Part I, (a period of professional training and/or study at an approved institution abroad, DIS or DIntS), candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part B, with no module mark less than 30% and obtain an average mark in Part B of at least 55%.

To progress from Part C to either Part D or Part I, (a period of professional training and/or study at an approved institution abroad, DIS or DIntS), candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part C, with no module mark less than 30% and obtain an average mark in Part C of at least 55%.

 

5.2 Degree Award 

To qualify for the award of the degree of Master of Engineering, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part D, with no module marks less than 30%.

In addition, candidates should normally obtain a mark of at least 50% in all modules with codes of the form WSD5xx taken in Part D.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

A candidate's final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments at Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 15: Part C 42.5: Part D 42.5, to determine the final Programme Mark.

Programme Specification

EL MEng (Hons) Electronic and Computer Systems Engineering (Students undertaking Part C in 2019)

Academic Year: 2019/20

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)
Institute of Measurement and Control (InstMC)

 

Final award MEng/ MEng + DIS/ MEng + DPS/ MEng + DIntS
Programme title Electronic and Computer Systems Engineering
Programme code WSUM30
Length of programme The duration of the programme is 8 semesters or 10 semesters if taken with either the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) or the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS). The programme is only available on a full-time basis.
UCAS code H612, H613
Admissions criteria

http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/electronic-computer-systems-engineering/

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

To meet the aims of the MEng programme in Electronic and Computer Systems Engineering and to further enhance a student’s learning experience by providing a high quality educational experience, for well motivated high achievers, that:

  • A1.   increases the depth and breadth of technical study to the level expected of Masters level graduates;
  • A2.   develops knowledge and skills, to a depth and breadth expected of Masters level graduates, as a preparation for a career in the electronic and electrical engineering industry;
  • A3.   develops an enhanced capacity for independent learning, planning and self–reliance;
  • A4.   enhances teamwork and leadership skills, equipping graduates of the programme to play leading roles in industry and potentially take responsibility for future innovation and change

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: Engineering Technician, Incorporated Engineer and Chartered Engineer Standard, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2013.

UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2014.

Guidance Note on Academic Accreditation, Engineering Council UK, July 2014.

The UK Quality Code for Higher Education, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, April 2012.

Subject Benchmark Statement: Engineering: The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, November 2010.

Master's Degree Characteristics, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, March 2010.

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate a knowledge and understanding of:

  • K1.   mathematical methods appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines, including their limitations and range of applicability
  • K2.   principles of engineering appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines, including their range of applicability;
  • K3.   principles of Information Technology and Communications appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines;
  • K4.   design principles and techniques appropriate to relevant components, equipment and associated software;
  • K5.   characteristics of relevant engineering components;
  • K6.   management and business practices appropriate to engineering industries, their application and limitations;
  • K7.   codes of practice and regulatory frameworks relevant to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines;
  • K8.   operational practices and requirements for safe operation relevant to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines;
  • K9.   the professional and ethical responsibilities of engineers;
  • K9.   team roles, team-working skills and leadership skills;
  • K10.  relevant research methods.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate:

  • C1.   an understanding of standard mathematical and computer based methods for modelling and analysing a range of practical and hypothetical engineering problems, and the essential principles of modelling and analysing routine engineering systems, processes, components and products;
  • C2.   an ability to develop innovative solutions to practical engineering problems;
  • C3.   a competence in defining and solving practical engineering problems;
  • C4.   the ability to apply engineering processes in a range practical contexts.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • P1.   use appropriate or novel mathematical methods for modelling and analysing pertinent engineering problems;
  • P2.   select and use relevant test and measurement equipment;
  • P3.   plan and execute safely novel or unfamiliar experimental laboratory work;
  • P4.   select and use computational tools and packages (including programming languages where appropriate);
  • P5.   design, and where appropriate construct, new systems, components or processes;
  • P6.   undertake testing of design ideas in the laboratory or by simulation, and analyse and critically evaluate the results;
  • P7.   search for, retrieve and evaluate information, ideas and data from a variety of sources;
  • P8.   manage a project and produce technical reports, papers, diagrams and drawings at an appropriate level.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • T1.   manipulate, sort and present data in a range of forms;
  • T2.   use evidence based methods in the solution of complex problems;
  • T3.   work with limited, incomplete and/or contradictory information in the solution of unfamiliar problems;
  • T4.   use an engineering and/or systems approach to the solution of problems in unfamiliar situations;
  • T5.   be creative and innovative in problem solving;
  • T6.   work effectively as part of a team and show potential for leadership;
  • T7.   use a wide range of information and communications technology;
  • T8.   manage time and resources;
  • T9.   use appropriate management tools;
  • T10.  communicate effectively orally, visually and in writing at an appropriate level;
  • T11.  learn effectively, continuously and independently in a variety of environments.

4. Programme structure

These Programme Specifications apply to the conduct of the programme in the 2018-19 session and should not be construed as being relevant to any other session.  These Programme Specifications may be subject to change from time to time.  Notice of change will be given by the School responsible for the programme.

In the following tables, ‘c’ indicates a compulsory module and ‘o’ indicates an optional module. The optional modules ‘oA’, ‘oB’, ‘oC’ and ‘oD’ should be considered along with the text following the table in which they appear.

Modules indicated as being taught in both Semester 1 and Semester 2 have elements of assessment in each semester however examinations for these modules normally occur during the Semester 2 examination period. Modules indicated as being taught in a single semester are assessed entirely within that semester.

4.1       Part A - Introductory Modules

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
ELA005 Electromagnetism A 10 2 C
ELA004 Signals and Systems 20 1+2 C
ELA007 Introduction to Systems Engineering for Projects 20 1+2 C
MAA303 Mathematics A 20 1+2 C
ELA001 Circuits 20 1+2 C
ELA003 Electronics A 20 1+2 C
ELA010 Programming and Software Design 20 1+2 C

The 20 credit module ELA001 Circuits is taught over both semesters, 2/3 of the module is taught in Semester 1 and 1/3 in Semester 2.

 

4.2       Part B - Degree Modules

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
ELB014 Software Engineering 15 1+2 C
ELB019 Computer Architecture 15 1+2 C
ELB020 Introduction to FPGA Design 15 1+2 C
ELB010 Electronics B 20 1+2 C
MAB303 Mathematics B 20 1+2 C
ELB006 Systems Integration 20 1+2 OA
ELB013 Engineering Project Management 20 1+2 OA
ELB002 Communications 15 1+2 OB
ELB004 Control Systems Design 15 1+2 OB

 

Students should take one of the optional modules marked oA and one marked oB.

4.3       Part I

Code Title
WSI010 Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (Non-credit bearing)
WSI020 Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (Non-credit bearing)
WSI035 Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) (Non-credit bearing)

For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS), or Diploma in International Studies (DIntS), Part I will be between Part B and C or Parts C and D and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulations XX.

 

4.4       Part C - Degree Modules

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSC008 Business Management 15 1+2 C
WSC018 Real-Time Software Engineering 15 1+2 C
WSC054 Electronic System Design with FPGAs 15 1+2 C
WSC055 Digital Interfacing and Instrumentation 15 1+2 C
WSD001 Team Project 30 1+2 C
WSC002 Principles of Digital Communications 15 1+2 OA
WSC004 Computer Networks 15 1+2 OA
WSC013 Electromagnetic Compatibility 15 1+2 OA
WSC014 Biophotonics Engineering 15 1+2 OA
WSC030 Bioelectricity - Fundamentals and Applications 15 1+2 OA
WSC039 Microwave Communication Systems 15 1+2 OA
WSC041 Digital and State Space Control 15 1+2 OA
WSC056 Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing 15 1+2 OA
DSC502 Human Factors in Systems Design C 15 1+2 OA
MPC022 Materials Properties and Applications 15 1+2 OA
XXXXXX Options from the University Catalogue

30

1+2 OB

Option modules with a total weight of 30 credits should be chosen. 

The option OB allows a free choice of modules worth 30 credits from the University Catalogue. This choice should be restricted to modules from Part C or D level, subject to the overall requirement for the Part that at least 90 credits should be from Part D level or above. The total of 120 credits should be arranged as near to 60 credits per semester as possible.

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

  

4.5       Part D - Degree Modules

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSD030 Advanced Project 50 1+2 C
WSD034 Applying Management Theory 10 1+2 C
WSD530 Programming Multi/many-core Systems 15 1 C
WSD506 Digital Signal Processing 15 1 OA
WSD509 Communication Networks 15 1 OA
WSD510 Personal Radio Communications 15 1 OA
WSD511 Information Theory and Coding 15 1 OA
WSD515 Communication Channels 15 1 OA
WSD568 Sensors and Actuators for Control 15 1 OA
WSD062 Understanding Complexity 15 2 OA
WSD508 Digital Signal Processing for Software Defined Radio 15 2 OA
WSD516 Telecommunication Network Security 15 2 OA
WSD517 Mobile Network Technologies 15 2 OA
WSD525 Advanced Electronics Engineering Applications 15 2 OA
WSD032 Microwave Circuits Laboratory 15 1+2 OB
XXXXXX Options from the University Catalogue 30 1+2 OC

 

The optional modules listed oA are block taught in one week or two week long blocks, while those listed oB run over both semesters.

 

The option oC allows a free choice of modules worth 30 credits from the University Catalogue. This choice should be restricted to modules from Part C or D level, subject to the overall requirement for the Part that at least 90 credits should be from Part D level or above. The total of 120 credits should be arranged as near to 60 credits per semester as possible.

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

 

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 Criteria for programme progression

 

Progression from Part A to Part B, Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D will be subnject to the provisions set out in Regulation XX and in addition candidates must accumulate 120 credits and achieve an overall average of 55% in that part.

For candidates who commence study on the programme before October, 2016:

To progress from Part A to Part B, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part A, with no module mark less than 30% and obtain an average mark in Part A of at least 55%.

To progress from Part B to either Part C or Part I, (a period of professional training and/or study at an approved institution abroad, DIS or DIntS), candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part B, with no module mark less than 30% and obtain an average mark in Part B of at least 55%.

To progress from Part C to either Part D or Part I, (a period of professional training and/or study at an approved institution abroad, DIS or DIntS), candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part C, with no module mark less than 30% and obtain an average mark in Part C of at least 55%.

5.2  Degree award

To qualify for the award of the Degree of Master of Engineering, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part D, with no module mark less than 30%.  In addition, candidates should normally obtain a mark of at least 50% in all modules with codes of the form WSD5xx taken in Part D.

 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

A candidate's final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments at Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX.  The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 15: Part C 42.5: Part D 42.5, to determine the final Programme Mark.

Programme Specification

EL MEng (Hons) Electronic and Computer Systems Engineering (Students undertaking Part D in 2019)

Academic Year: 2019/20

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)
Institute of Measurement and Control (InstMC)

 

Final award MEng/ MEng + DIS/ MEng + DIntS
Programme title Electronic and Computer Systems Engineering
Programme code WSUM30
Length of programme The duration of the programme is 8 semesters or 10 semesters if taken with either the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) or the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS). The programme is only available on a full-time basis.
UCAS code H612, H613
Admissions criteria

http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/electronic-computer-systems-engineering/

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

To meet the aims of the MEng programme in Electronic and Computer Systems Engineering and to further enhance a student’s learning experience by providing a high quality educational experience, for well motivated high achievers, that:

  • A1.   increases the depth and breadth of technical study to the level expected of Masters level graduates;
  • A2.   develops knowledge and skills, to a depth and breadth expected of Masters level graduates, as a preparation for a career in the electronic and electrical engineering industry;
  • A3.   develops an enhanced capacity for independent learning, planning and self–reliance;
  • A4.   enhances teamwork and leadership skills, equipping graduates of the programme to play leading roles in industry and potentially take responsibility for future innovation and change

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: Engineering Technician, Incorporated Engineer and Chartered Engineer Standard, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2013.

UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2014.

Guidance Note on Academic Accreditation, Engineering Council UK, July 2014.

The UK Quality Code for Higher Education, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, April 2012.

Subject Benchmark Statement: Engineering: The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, November 2010.

Master's Degree Characteristics, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, March 2010.

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate a knowledge and understanding of:

  • K1.   mathematical methods appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines, including their limitations and range of applicability
  • K2.   principles of engineering appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines, including their range of applicability;
  • K3.   principles of Information Technology and Communications appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines;
  • K4.   design principles and techniques appropriate to relevant components, equipment and associated software;
  • K5.   characteristics of relevant engineering components;
  • K6.   management and business practices appropriate to engineering industries, their application and limitations;
  • K7.   codes of practice and regulatory frameworks relevant to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines;
  • K8.   operational practices and requirements for safe operation relevant to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines;
  • K9.   the professional and ethical responsibilities of engineers;
  • K10.  team roles, team-working skills and leadership skills;
  • K11.  relevant research methods.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate:

  • C1.   an understanding of standard mathematical and computer based methods for modelling and analysing a range of practical and hypothetical engineering problems, and the essential principles of modelling and analysing routine engineering systems, processes, components and products;
  • C2.   an ability to develop innovative solutions to practical engineering problems;
  • C3.   a competence in defining and solving practical engineering problems;
  • C4.   the ability to apply engineering processes in a range practical contexts.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • P1.   use appropriate or novel mathematical methods for modelling and analysing pertinent engineering problems;
  • P2.   select and use relevant test and measurement equipment;
  • P3.   plan and execute safely novel or unfamiliar experimental laboratory work;
  • P4.   select and use computational tools and packages (including programming languages where appropriate);
  • P5.   design, and where appropriate construct, new systems, components or processes;
  • P6.   undertake testing of design ideas in the laboratory or by simulation, and analyse and critically evaluate the results;
  • P7.   search for, retrieve and evaluate information, ideas and data from a variety of sources;
  • P8.   manage a project and produce technical reports, papers, diagrams and drawings at an appropriate level.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • T1.   manipulate, sort and present data in a range of forms;
  • T2.   use evidence based methods in the solution of complex problems;
  • T3.   work with limited, incomplete and/or contradictory information in the solution of unfamiliar problems;
  • T4.   use an engineering and/or systems approach to the solution of problems in unfamiliar situations;
  • T5.   be creative and innovative in problem solving;
  • T6.   work effectively as part of a team and show potential for leadership;
  • T7.   use a wide range of information and communications technology;
  • T8.   manage time and resources;
  • T9.   use appropriate management tools;
  • T10.  communicate effectively orally, visually and in writing at an appropriate level;
  • T11.  learn effectively, continuously and independently in a variety of environments.

4. Programme structure

These Programme Specifications apply to the conduct of the programme in the 2018-19 session and should not be construed as being relevant to any other session.  These Programme Specifications may be subject to change from time to time.  Notice of change will be given by the School responsible for the programme.

In the following tables, ‘c’ indicates a compulsory module and ‘o’ indicates an optional module. The optional modules ‘oA’, ‘oB’, ‘oC’ and ‘oD’ should be considered along with the text following the table in which they appear.

Modules indicated as being taught in both Semester 1 and Semester 2 have elements of assessment in each semester however examinations for these modules normally occur during the Semester 2 examination period. Modules indicated as being taught in a single semester are assessed entirely within that semester.

4.1       Part A - Introductory Modules

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
ELA005 Electromagnetism A 10 2 C
ELA004 Signals and Systems 20 1+2 C
ELA007 Introduction to Systems Engineering for Projects 20 1+2 C
MAA303 Mathematics A 20 1+2 C
ELA001 Circuits 20 1+2 C
ELA003 Electronics A 20 1+2 C
ELA010 Programming and Software Design 20 1+2 C

The 20 credit module ELA001 Circuits is taught over both semesters, 2/3 of the module is taught in Semester 1 and 1/3 in Semester 2.

 

4.2       Part B - Degree Modules

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
ELB014 Software Engineering 15 1+2 C
ELB019 Computer Architecture 15 1+2 C
ELB020 Introduction to FPGA Design 15 1+2 C
ELB010 Electronics B 20 1+2 C
MAB303 Mathematics B 20 1+2 C
ELB006 Systems Integration 20 1+2 OA
ELB013 Engineering Project Management 20 1+2 OA
ELB002 Communications 15 1+2 OB
ELB004 Control Systems Design 15 1+2 OB

 

Students should take one of the optional modules marked oA and one marked oB.

 

4.3       Part C - Degree Modules

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
ELC008 Business Management 15 1+2 C
ELC018 Real-Time Software Engineering 15 1+2 C
ELC054 Electronic System Design with FPGAs 15 1+2 C
ELC055 Digital Interfacing and Instrumentation 15 1+2 C
ELD002 Group Project 30 1+2 C
ELB002 Communications 15 1+2 OA
ELB004 Control System Design 15 1+2 OA
ELC002 Principles of Digital Communications 15 1+2 OB
ELC004 Computer Networks 15 1+2 OB
ELC013 Electromagnetic Compatibility 15 1+2 OB
ELC014 Biophotonics Engineering 15 1+2 OB
ELC030 Bioelectricity - Fundamentals and Applications 15 1+2 OB
ELC039 Microwave Communication Systems 15 1+2 OB
ELC041 Digital and State Space Control 15 1+2 OB
ELC056 Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing 15 1+2 OB
DSC502 Human Factors in Systems Design 15 1+2 OB
MPC022 Materials Properties and Applications 15 1+2 OB
XXXXXX Options from the University Catalogue

30

1+2 OC

Option modules with a total weight of 30 credits should be chosen.

 

Options listed as oA will normally continue to be delivered throughout the Semester 1 examination period, while options listed as oB will normally be suspended during the Semester 1 examination period. Modules marked oA may only be chosen if they were not taken at Part B.

 

The option oC allows a free choice of modules worth 30 credits from the University Catalogue. This choice should be restricted to modules from Part C or D level, subject to the overall requirement for the Part that at least 90 credits should be from Part D level or above. The total of 120 credits should be arranged as near to 60 credits per semester as possible.

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

  

4.4       Part D - Degree Modules

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSD030 Advanced Project 50 1+2 C
WSD034 Applying Management Theory 10 1+2 C
WSD530 Programming Multi/many-core Systems 15 1 C
WSD506 Digital Signal Processing 15 1 OA
WSD509 Communication Networks 15 1 OA
WSD510 Personal Radio Communications 15 1 OA
WSD511 Information Theory and Coding 15 1 OA
WSD515 Communication Channels 15 1 OA
WSD568 Sensors and Actuators for Control 15 1 OA
WSD062 Understanding Complexity 15 2 OA
WSD508 Digital Signal Processing for Software Defined Radio 15 2 OA
WSD516 Telecommunication Network Security 15 2 OA
WSD517 Mobile Network Technologies 15 2 OA
WSD525 Advanced Electronic Engineering Applications 15 2 OA
WSD032 Microwave Circuits Laboratory 15 1+2 OB
XXXXXX Options from the University Catalogue 30 1+2 OC

 

The optional modules listed oA are block taught in one week or two week long blocks, while those listed oB run over both semesters.

 

The option oC allows a free choice of modules worth 30 credits from the University Catalogue. This choice should be restricted to modules from Part C or D level, subject to the overall requirement for the Part that at least 90 credits should be from Part D level or above. The total of 120 credits should be arranged as near to 60 credits per semester as possible.

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

 

4.5  Part I - Industrial or International training

For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) or the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C or between Parts C and D and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 Criteria for programme progression

 

Progression from Part A to Part B, from Part B to Part C, from Part C to Part D will be subjected to the provisions set out in Regulation XX and in addition candidates must accumulate 120 credits and achieve an overall average of 55% in that part.

For candidates who commence study on the programme before October, 2016:

To progress from Part A to Part B, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part A, with no module mark less than 30% and obtain an average mark in Part A of at least 55%.

To progress from Part B to either Part C or Part I, (a period of professional training and/or study at an approved institution abroad, DIS or DIntS), candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part B, with no module mark less than 30% and obtain an average mark in Part B of at least 55%.

To progress from Part C to either Part D or Part I, (a period of professional training and/or study at an approved institution abroad, DIS or DIntS), candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part C, with no module mark less than 30% and obtain an average mark in Part C of at least 55%.

5.2  Degree award

To qualify for the award of the Degree of Master of Engineering, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part D, with no module mark less than 30%.  In addition, candidates should normally obtain a mark of at least 50% in all modules with codes of the form WSD5xx taken in Part D.

 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

A candidate's final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments at Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX.  The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 15: Part C 42.5: Part D 42.5, to determine the final Programme Mark.

Programme Specification

MM BEng (Hons) Sports Technology (2019 Entry)

Academic Year: 2019/20

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)

Institution of Engineering Designers (IED)

Final award BEng / BEng + DIS / BEng + DPS / BEng DIntS
Programme title Sports Technology
Programme code WSUB05
Length of programme The duration of the programme is 6 semesters, or 8 semesters if students undertake the additional period of study, normally between Parts B and C, leading to the award of the Diploma in Industrial Studies, the Diploma in Professional Studies, or the Diploma of International Studies.
UCAS code CH67/HC76
Admissions criteria

BEng - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/ch67

BEng + DPS/DIntS - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/hc76

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

Sports Technology programme aims to:

 

  • Develop graduates with a detailed knowledge and understanding of sport-related product design, manufacture and test, human performance and business studies.
  • Develop graduates with the ability to conduct research and design in sports technology and solve associated problems using both established and contemporary ideas and techniques.
  • Produce graduates with the analytical and transferable skills that will enable employment in a wide variety of professions and to make a valuable contribution to society.
  • Support graduates to manage their own learning, communicate effectively and make use of primary source materials.
  • Provide graduates with an appreciation of the essential practical, commercial and broader societal aspects of engineering.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015). 

  • Engineering Council (UK). ‘UK-SPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan.2014. 

  • Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014. 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:

  • the underpinning science, mathematics and other disciplines associated with careers related to the design of sports / engineering equipment;
  • the characteristics of engineering materials, equipment and processes and an awareness of basic mechanical workshop practices;
  • the role of instrumentation and measurement techniques within equipment evaluation and experimental protocol design;
  • principles of industrial design, engineering design and manufacturing design;
  • ergonomic and aesthetic considerations and how they impact on sports design;
  • the variability in human performance capability and methods of evaluation including fitness and training principles relating to sport and exercise;
  • principles governing the mechanics and biomechanics of sports movements;
  • the role of information technology in providing support of product design and manufacturing;
  • management techniques and business practices and the commercial and economic context of a sports / engineering business;
  • intellectual property issues and environmental, legal and ethical issues within the modern industrial world.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able:

  • identify and define a design or sports engineering problem and generate innovative solutions;
  • analyse, objectively evaluate and apply the principles of industrial design, and engineering design;
  • utilise the principles of engineering science in the development of solutions to problems;
  • apply appropriate methods to model such solutions;
  • apply biomechanics to the analysis of movement in sport;
  • demonstrate an awareness of form, function, fit, aesthetics, environment and safety;
  • select and apply appropriate IT tools to product design and manufacture problems;
  • evaluate commercial risk and market trends within the sports sector
  • apply general marketing principles to the sports sector.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able:

  • research information, generate and evaluate product design ideas;
  • communicate design ideas through the presentation of concept drawings, computer graphics and conventional sketching;
  • prepare engineering drawings and technical reports;
  • test design concepts via practical investigation;
  • use appropriate computer software and laboratory equipment;
  • use measurement and test equipment to complete experimental laboratory work and collect mechanical and biomechanical data;
  • use a variety of observation and test methods to appraise human function and movement
  • present technical and business information in a variety of ways;
  • manage the design process taking account of customer constraints such as cost, health and safety, risk and environmental issues.

 

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able:

  • generate and manipulate data;
  • apply creative, structured and evidence-based approaches to problem solving;
  • communicate effectively through written, graphical, interpersonal and presentation skills;
  • organise and manage time and resources to meet deadlines;
  • work effectively both in a team and independently;
  • demonstrate organisational and management skills.

4. Programme structure

4.1    Part A - Introductory Modules

 

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
MAA307 Engineering Mathematics 20 1+2 C
WSA401 Product Design (Ergonomics & Visualisation) 20 1+2 C
WSA502 Applied Sports Technology 1 20 1+2 C
WSA400 Application of CAD for Engineering Designers 10 1 C
WSA602 Introduction to Materials and Manufacturing Processes 10 1 C
PSA028 Biomechanics of Sport 10 1 C
WSA700 Measurement Principles 10 2 C
WSA701 Mechanical Design in Sport 10 2 C
WSA900 Electronic and Electrical Technology 1 10 2 C

                

4.2    Part B - Degree Modules 

 

Code Title Weight Semester C/O
WSB302 Engineering Computation for Sports Technology 20 1+2 C
WSB502 Applied Sports Technology 2 20 1+2 C
WSB503 Application of Product Design for Sports 20 1+2 C
BSB520 Principles of Marketing for Sport & Leisure 10 1 C
WSB700 Sports Goods Design, Manufacturing and Test 10 1 C
WSB701 Measurement and Experimental Design 10 1 C
MAB206 Statistics 10 2 C
PSB002 Structural Kinesiology 10 2 C
PSB028 Methods of Analysis in Sports Biomechanics 10 2 C

 

4.3    Part I – Optional Placement Year 

 

Code Title
WSI010 DIS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing)
WSI015 Industrial Training Placement (DIS, non credit bearing)
WSI020 DPS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing)
WSI035 DIntS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing)

For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.

 

4.4    Part C - Degree Modules

Students MUST choose 20 credits of optional modules (O) in Semester One, with no more than 10 credits from each group.

Students MUST choose 30 credits of optional modules (O) in Semester Two, with no more than 10 credits from each group. 

 

Code  Title   Weight Semester C/O 
WSC500 Individual Project 40 1+2 C
WSC200 Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality 10 1 C
WSC701 Sports Surfaces, Footwear and Garments 10 1 C
WSC702 Sports Equipment Industry 10 2 C
WSC600 Advanced Manufacturing Processes & Technology 1 10 1 OA
WSC602 Sustainable Manufacturing 10 1 OA
WSC606 Additive Manufacturing for Product Development 10 1 OA
PSC028 Advanced Methods of Analysis in Sports Biomechanics 10 1 OB
WSC201 Organisation Structure and Strategy 10 1 OB
WSC400 Design for Assembly 10 1 OB
WSC401 Product Design (Design Methods and Communication) 10 1 OC
PSC100 Science and Elite Performance in Sport 20 1+2 OC
WSC203 Manufacturing Planning & Control 10 2 OD
WSC204 Management of the Human Resource 10 2 OD
WSC300 Product Information Systems - Computer Aided Design 10 2 OE
MPC012 Polymer Engineering Processes and Manufacture 10 2 OE
PSC029 Mechanics of Sports Technology 10 2 OF
WSC610 Healthcare Engineering 10 2 OF

 

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

 

 

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to Part C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX. 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Part B and Part C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX.  The overall average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 40: Part C 60, to determine the degree classification.

Programme Specification

MM BEng (Hons) Engineering Management (2019 Entry)

Academic Year: 2019/20

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)

Institution of Mechanical Engineers (IMechE)

Final award BEng / BEng + DPS / BEng + DIS / BEng + DInts
Programme title Engineering Management
Programme code WSUB04
Length of programme The duration of the programme is 6 semesters, or 8 semesters if students undertake the additional period of study, between Parts B and C, leading to the award of the Diploma of Industrial Studies, Diploma of Professional Studies or the Diploma of International Studies.
UCAS code N290/N291
Admissions criteria

BEng - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/n290

BEng + DPS/DIntS - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/n291

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

This programme is aimed at:

  • Educating engineering management graduates ready to play a substantial role in industrial  companies through a substantive base of knowledge and understanding at the forefront of the discipline of engineering and manufacturing.
  • Providing a foundation for graduates wishing to progress to professional engineering management status.
  • Providing a high quality educational experience for students in a programme of study which combines wide ranging aspects of engineering design and technologies, management models and methodologies, marketing, finance, and business in engineering.
  • Preparing graduates to apply organisational and project management, team building, and leadership skills in engineering.
  • Developing analytical and transferable skills that will enable graduates to gain employment in a wide variety of professional roles and to take an ethical approach in making a valuable contribution to society.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015). 

  • Engineering Council (UK). ‘UK-SPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan.2014. 

  • Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014. 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:

  • the engineering principles and their application to the analysis of key engineering processes;
  • the application of quantitative, analytical, modelling and computational methods in order to identify, classify and describe the performance of systems and components and to solve engineering problems and to implement appropriate actions;
  • the requirement for engineering activities to promote sustainable development and the application of quantitative techniques where appropriate;
  • working with information that may be incomplete or uncertain and quantify the effect of this on the design;
  • the evaluation of business, customer and user needs, including considerations such as the wider engineering context, public perception and aesthetics;
  • the engineering and business problems, identifying any constraints including environmental and sustainability limitations; ethical, health, safety, security and risk issues, intellectual property; codes of practice and standards;
  • the commercial, economic and social context of engineering processes;
  • the management techniques, including project management, that may be used to achieve engineering objectives, including the planning and managing the design process, including cost drivers, and evaluate outcomes;
  • awareness of relevant legal requirements governing engineering activities, including personnel, health & safety, contract, intellectual property rights, product safety and liability issues;
  • the risk issues, including health & safety, environmental and commercial risk, and risk assessment and risk management techniques.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • appreciate the broad range of influences and activities within the engineering processes and explain their significance;
  • evaluate technical and commercial risk and make decision based on available information;
  • address human factors considerations in engineering processes and design;
  • analyse engineering problems to assist in the management of engineering processes;
  • identify solutions to engineering problems from a sustainable/environmental standpoint;
  • contribute to the innovation development of a new product and its introduction to the market.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • use the design and manufacturing processes to plan and manage engineering  projects;
  • plan and implement re-organisation of a company for increased effectiveness;
  • make effective use of graphical and modelling techniques for design development and communication;
  • adopt strategies for non-quantifiable engineering issues;
  • select suitable computer based techniques for engineering management problems;
  • generate new ideas and develop and evaluate a range of solutions;
  • knowledge of characteristics of particular materials, equipment, processes or products;
  • knowledge of relevant legal and contractual issues;
  • understanding of appropriate codes of practice and industry standards;
  • awareness of quality issues and their application to continuous improvement;
  • understanding of, and the ability to work in, different roles within an engineering team.

 

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able:

  • plan and monitor multi-disciplinary projects;
  • appreciate the central role of management within engineering;
  • communicate effectively and make presentations of a technical/business nature to achieve maximum impact;
  • identify methods to assist in innovation, team-working and engineering communication;
  • demonstrate competence in using computer based engineering techniques;
  • adopt systematic approach to integrating design requirements, materials and structures;
  • use time and resources effectively;
  • exercise initiative and personal responsibility, which may be as a team member or leader.

 

 

 

4. Programme structure

4.1  Part A – Introductory Modules

Code Title Modular Weight Semester C/O
MAA307 Engineering Mathematics 20 1+2 C
WSA102 Engineering Science 20 1+2 C
WSA604 Materials & Manufacturing Processes 20 1+2 C
BSA505 Organisational Behaviour 10 1 C
WSA400 Application of CAD for Engineering Designers 10 1 C
WSA501 Integrating Studies 1a 10 1 C
WSA210 Manufacturing Management 10 2 C
WSA504 Integrating Studies 1b 10 2 C
WSA900 Electronics and Electrical Technology 10 2 C

           

4.2  Part B - Degree Modules

Code Title Modular Weight Semester C/O
WSB600 Manufacturing Process and Technology 20 1+2 C
BSB030 Marketing 10 1 C
BSB580 Operations Management 10 1 C
WSB310 Engineering Management and Modelling 10 1 C
WSB505 Manufacturing Design 10 1 C
WSB610 Manufacturing Technology 10 1 C
BSB135 Consumer Behaviour 10 2 C
MAB206 Statistics 10 2 C
WSB301 Software Engineering 10 2 C
WSB203 Manufacturing Planning and Control 10 2 C
WSB204 Management of the Human Resource 10 2 C

 

4.3    Part I – Optional Placement Year

 

Code Title
WSI010 DIS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing)
WSI020 DPS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing)
WSI035 DIntS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing)

 

For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.

 

4.4    Part C - Degree Modules 

Students MUST choose ONE optional module (10 credits).

Code Title Modular Weight Semester C/O
WSC500 Individual Project 40 1+2 C
WSC200 Engineering Management: Finance Law and Quality 10 1 C
WSC201 Organisational Structure & Strategy 10 1 C
WSC602 Sustainable Manufacturing 10 1 C
WSD207 Project Management 10 1 C
WSC206 Product Innovation Management 10 2 C
WSD203 Lean Operations and Supply Chain Management 10 2 C
WSD407 Sustainable Product Design 10 2 C
WSC300 Product Information System - Computer Aided Design 10 2 O
WSC603 Metrology 10 2 O
WSC610 Healthcare Engineering 10 2 O
WSC700 Sports Engineering 10 2 O

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

 4.5    Study Overseas 

Students may choose to study Part C – Semester 1 at an approved Overseas Higher Education Institution.  The mix of subjects of the learning programme must be approved in advance by the Programme Director.  The proposed programme of learning will include work on an Individual Project. 

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to Part C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Part B and Part C, in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX.  The overall average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 40: Part C 60, to determine the degree classification.

Programme Specification

EL MEng (Hons) Robotics, Mechatronics and Control Engineering (2018 Entry)

Academic Year: 2019/20

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our Terms and Conditions of Study.

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see University Regulations)
  • Module Specifications
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at Loughborough (available soon)
  • What makes Loughborough University programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution Loughborough University
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)

Final award MEng/MEng + DPS/MEng + DInts/MEng +DIS
Programme title Robotics, Mechatronics and Control Engineering
Programme code WSUM35
Length of programme The duration of the programme is 8 semesters or 10 semesters if taken with the Diploma in Industrial Studies, Diploma of Professional Studies of Diploma of International Studies. The programme is only available on a full-time basis.
UCAS code H673, H674
Admissions criteria

MEng - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/h673

MEng + DPS/DInts - http://www.lboro.ac.uk/h674

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The MEng in Robotics, Mechatronics and Control Engineering aims to: 

  • A1.   Prepare highly skilled graduates to pursue careers in Robotics, Mechatronics and Control Engineering  across a range of industries and activities involving the design, development and analysis of complex systems
  • A2.   Provide a high-quality learning experience across a complete range of core subjects in order to give students the skills to investigate robotics, mechatronics and control engineering problems.
  • A3.   Develop engineers capable of designing innovative systems and managing the development process in order to deliver solutions that meet the requirements of customers.
  • A4.   Produce engineers with extensive knowledge and understanding of engineering management and business practices and of the relevant ethical, business, sustainability and legal constraints.
  • A5.   Develop graduates capable of integrating their knowledge of mathematics, science and the broader engineering context to solve complex problems.
  • A6.   Promote innovation in engineering practice by applying appropriate knowledge, skills, tools and techniques in the analysis, diagnosis and solution of industry-related problems.
  • A7.   Support personal and professional development, including, problem solving, leadership, team work and both oral and written presentation skills, as well as the ability to take the initiative in improving personal performance.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: Engineering Technician, Incorporated Engineer and Chartered Engineer Standard, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2013.
  • UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2014.
  • Guidance Note on Academic Accreditation, Engineering Council UK, July 2014.
  • The UK Quality Code for Higher Education, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, April 2012.
  • Subject Benchmark Statement: Engineering, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, November 2010.
  • Master's Degree Characteristics, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, March 2010.

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to: 

  • K1.   Demonstrate a comprehensive understanding of scientific, mathematical and engineering principles appropriate to robotics, mechatronics and control engineering
  • K2.   Demonstrate an understanding of general engineering and broader principles relevant to engineering
  • K3.   Understand the commercial, economic and sustainable aspects in the application of engineering processes
  • K4.   Demonstrate awareness of the relevant codes of practice and regulatory frameworks and the operational practices for safe operation of engineering processes
  • K5.   Demonstrate extensive knowledge of the application of management and business practices appropriate to engineering industries, including their limitations
  • K6.   Recognise the professional and ethical responsibilities of engineers
  • K7.   Demonstrate awareness of developing technologies in  robotics, mechatronics and control engineering
  • K8.   Draw on a deep understanding of robotics, mechatronics and control to form original solutions to engineering problems, some of which may have incomplete specifications.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to: 

  • C1.   Apply engineering principles to the analysis of robotics, mechatronics and control engineering  problems;
  • C2.   Apply mathematical and computer-based methods for modelling and analysing a range of practical and hypothetical engineering processes, components and products;
  • C3.   Generate innovative designs for engineering problems within the framework of economic, social, ethical and environmental issues;
  • C4.   Evaluate and respond to customer needs, including fitness for purpose and cost;
  • C5.   Follow essential design principles appropriate to relevant components, equipment and associated software.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to: 

  • P1.   Demonstrate a comprehensive understanding of design, modelling, simulation and analytical methods and tools appropriate to robotics, mechatronics and control engineering
  • P2.   Demonstrate a thorough understanding of current practice in defining and solving practical engineering problems, including its limitations and likely future direction
  • P3.   Demonstrate an ability to manage the design process
  • P4.   Use conventional laboratory equipment and relevant test and measurement equipment in an appropriate and safe manner
  • P5.   Apply engineering techniques taking into account relevant codes of practice, commercial constraints and industry standards
  • P6.   Demonstrate awareness of contractual issues and intellectual property rights
  • P7.   Work with technical uncertainty
  • P8.   Use appropriate management tools for project work.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to: 

  • T1.   Search and retrieve information, ideas and data from a variety of sources
  • T2.   Select and analyse appropriate evidence and data to solve problems;
  • T3.   Apply skills in problem solving, communication, team working and in the use of general software tools;
  • T4.   Develop a personal work plan and take responsibility for its execution, independently, as team member or as a team leader;
  • T5.   Produce appropriate technical reports, papers, diagrams and drawings;
  • T6.   Plan self-learning and be able to take the initiative in improving personal performance, as the foundation for lifelong learning

4. Programme structure

 

4.1 Part A 

Code

Title

Semester

Modular Weight

C/O 

WSA018

Industrial Project in Robotics, Mechatronics and Control Engineering

1 + 2

20

C

MAA103

Core Mathematics 1

1

10

C

WSA010

Programming and Software Design

1

20

C

WSA011

Electronic Circuits

1

20

C

MAA203

Core Mathematics 2

2

10

C

WSA012

Electrical Science A

2

20

C

WSA013

Digital Systems

2

20

C

 

4.2 Part B 

Code

Title

Semester

Modular Weight

 C/O

WSB013

Robotics Project Design and Management

1 + 2

20

C

MAB103

Advanced Mathematics 1

1

10

C

WSB010

Electronics

1

20

C

WSB140

Mechanics for Robotics

1

20

C

WSB004

Control System Design

2

20

C

WSB009

Mobile Robots

2

20

C

MAB203

Advanced Mathematics 2

2

10

C

 

4.3 Part I

Code

Title

WSI010 Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (Non-credit bearing)
WSI020 Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (Non-credit bearing)
WSI035 Diploma in International Studies (DInts) (Non-credit bearing)

For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS), or the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS), Part I will be between Parts B and C or between Parts C and D and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.

 

4.4 Part C 

Candidates must choose one option ‘o’ from Semester 2 

Code

Title

Semester

Modular Weight

C/O 

WSD001

Team Project

1 + 2

30

C

WSC012

Systems Engineering Applications

1

10

C

WSC041

Digital and State Space Control

1

20

C

WSC108

Manufacturing Automation and Control

1

10

C

WSC200

Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality

1

10

C

WSC055

Digital Interfacing and Instrumentation

2

20

C

WSC004

Computer Networks

2

20

O

WSC014

Bioelectricity and Biophotonics Engineering

2

20

O

WSC022

Power Electronics

2

20

O

WSC054

Electronic Systems Design with FPGAs

2

20

O

 

4.5 Part D 

Candidates must choose optional modules totalling 30 credits 

Code

Title

Semester

Modular Weight

 C/O

WSD030

Advanced Project

1 + 2

50

C

WSD034

Applying Management Theory

1 + 2

10

C

WSD568

Sensors and Actuators for Control

1

15

C

WSD527

Systems Modelling for Control Engineering

1

15

C

WSD516

Communication Network Security

2

15

OA

WSD532

Integration of Renewables

2

15

OA

WSD062

Understanding Complexity

2

15

OA

WSD517

Mobile Network Technologies

2

15

OA

XXXXXX

Options from the University Catalogue

1 + 2

30

OB

The optional modules listed oA are block taught in one week or two week long blocks, while those listed oB run over both semesters.

 

The option oB allows a free choice of modules worth 30 credits from the University Catalogue. This choice should be restricted to modules from Part C or D level, subject to the overall requirement for the Part that at least 90 credits should be from Part D level or above. The total of 120 credits should be arranged as near to 60 credits per semester as possible.

All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 Criteria for programme progression

Progression from Part A to Part B, from Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D will be subject to the provisions set out in Regulation XX and in addition candidates must accumulate 120 credits and achieve an overall average of 55% in each part. 

At the end of Parts A, B, or C candidates not meeting the progression requirements for the MEng after reassessment, or at the option of the candidate, may transfer to the BEng degree programme providing they meet the minimum requirements set out in Regulation XX. 

In the event of a candidate transfer